Manual s3 Is

1111111111111111111111111111111111
Canon CDI-E214
HvverShot S3 IS
DIGITAL CAMERA
[ Preparations I
[ Shooting I
[ Basic Shooting Functions I
Playback/Erasing
a
Basic Computer
Camera User Guide

Please Read This First
This guide explains how to prepare the camera and use its basic features.
DiG!CII t(
PictBridge
~ rJ
D1REa BUBBLE JET
.....,
Exit PIlRt
DPOF
f'j 4)
PRINT DlREa
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The following guides are available. Refer to them as necessary according
to the flowchart below.
For information on included
items and items sold separately
Preparations
• Installing the battery and memory card
• Opening the LCD monitor
• Setting the date, time and language
Shooting
IT] Basic Camera User
Guide (This Guide)
Read this first.
PlaybackJErasi ng
"
Menus and Settings
Handling precautions,
references to the various
shooting and playback functions IT] Advanced Camera User
Guide
C
... p_r_i_n_ti_n_g ,,}w? .IT] m<ecl P,lnt Use' Gu;dc
V
• Installing the software
• Downloading images to a
computer
• Using the software
IT] Soflwa<e Starte' Gu;de
~ ZoomScowse, EX!
i _ ImageBrowser
./~c. Software User Guide
• PDF manuals available on the Canon website.

http://web.canon.jp/lmaging/information-e.html
You can use SD* memory cards and MultiMediaCards with this camera.
These cards are collectively called memory cards in this guide.
* SD stands for Secure Digital, a copyright protection system.

Installing the Battery and Memory Card
1 Insert the batteries.

1. Open the battery cover (CD, @).
2. Insert four AA-size alkaline batteries supplied or separately sold
nickel metal hydride (NiMH) batteries, then close the cover.
(+) Positive end
Battery cover lock
1·.
~'~~I
~.:.:>o ~:-~O. •. .• .• .• .• .• .• .• .• .• ~<0' ~7'·. ·.~·. I~
. =
• .·.· .·
o
~ See the Advanced Guide: Battery Handling (p. 132) ~
~ See the Advanced Guide: Handling the MemoryCard(p. 133)

~See the Advanced Guide: Formatting MemoryCards(p. 35)

ITo Remove the Memory Card
Use your finger to push the memory card in until you hear a click, then
release it.
• "tJ
a;
"C
D)
~ First Time Settings

::::::I
til IOpening the LCD Monitor

Use the LCD monitor to confirm images while shooting them, navigate
menus, and play back images. You can position the LCD monitor in the
following ways.
1. Opened from left to right 180 degrees.
2. LCD monitor is opened to the left 180

degrees and tilted 180 degrees toward
the lens.
The displayed image is automatically flipped
and reversed (the Reverse Display
function).
* The Reverse Display function can be set

to off.
mSee the Advanced Guide: Ree. Menu (p. 28)
2
3. Fold the LCD monitor back against the
camera body until it clicks into place.
When you push the LCD monitor until you hear
the clicking sound, the left and right of the
image will display correctly.
~ See the Advanced Guide: Using the LCD Monitor (p. 16)
Ii¥l Always keep the LCD monitor c1os~d with the display facing the camera
LiJ body when the camera is not in use. When you push the LCD monitor
I
I
j
until you hear the clicking sound, the LCD monitor will automatically turn
off, and the image will display in the viewfinder.· I I
ITurning the Power On/Off
1 Turn the mode lever to Q

(Shooting) or [E] (Playback)
while pressing the release button. =>
The power/mode indicator lights orange or

green. __ ....,;;;;0,,_......
• When switching between shooting and

playback, turn the mode lever to Q
(Shooting) or m
(Playback)* while
pressing the refea'Se button.
* The camera switches to Playback mode, but the lens does not retract
(the lens will retract if you turn the mode lever to [E] (Playback) once
more).
2 Press the OFF button to turn the

power off.
3
~.• You will hear a start:~p s~Z;nd a~d see the start-up image when you'~l
ICjJ turn on the power (Advanced Guide: p. 117). However, when starting I
I with the viewfinder display, the start-up image is not displayed and I
I there is no start-up sound. Also the start-up image does not appear I
when the viewfinder display is on in Shooting mode (Advanced Guide: I
p. 16) or the AN OUT terminal is connected to a TV.
Turning on the camera without the start-up sound and image.
• Press and hold the \fJ
button, then turn on the power. You can also
i
~
turn the power on with the LCD monitor closed.
~ See the Advanced Guide: Mute (p. 31)
~ ,_~ __
. .wh"-""' ',u,w ,
I Setting the Date/Time
I 1 Turn the camera on (p. 3).
2 Select the item you wish to set

using the ..... or ~ button and
set its value using the'" or ..
button (CD).
3 Confirm that the correct time

is displayed and press the
SET button (@).
The date/time can also be set in the
Set up menu (p. 16).
m
See the Advanced Guide: Time Zone settings(p. 24)
::- Whe~ou tG~~-~th~~;me7athe fi~~Ttime:an-d;he~n th~ith~~ dateT-'!

time battery charge is low, the [Date/Time] menu appears.
~_._~ "__.~.~. .,__._ > ~See ~he Advanced GUide: Replacing the ~ate~~!~~2::~!J
4
I Setting the Display Language
1 Turn the mode lever to [E]

(Playback) while pressing the
release button (CD).
2 Hold down the SET button

(@) and press the MENU
button (@).
This operation cannot be performed
during movie playback, in the jump
I
search mode (Advanced Guide:
p. 94) or while connected to a printer
or computer.
3 Use the ~, ~, ... or" button to select a language (@), then press
the SET button (@).
The language can also be set in the Set up menu (p. 16).
5
1 Turn the mode lever to 0 (Shooting) while pressing the
release button (p. 3).
2 Set the mode dial to fD).

3 Aim the camera at the subject.
4 Focus and shoot.
1. Press the shutter button lightly (halfway) Lightly press
to focus. (Pressing halfway)
• Two beeps will sound when the camera II
I •
has finished focusing, and the AF frame .. - 1_,
I
,, /.
/
appears green.
• If the message "Raise the flash" appears,
en shoot with a flash (p. 11).
::r
o
g.
:;.
cc Iri¥l • The Image Stabilizer function is [On] in the default settings. i
I LiJ • The beep will sou nd one time if the subject is difficult to focus on. i
I!
C~thfYAdV1lnC$1<>Ui&fY:$ettin!lthel~ge'Stl,biI.lz~(F~nction(P.•39)
I:] See the Advanced Guide: Shooting Hard-to-Focus Subjects (p. 64)
~
2. Press the shutter button fully (all the way) Pressing fully
to shoot. (Pressing all the way)
The shutter sound will play, and the image

will record. The indicator will blink red while
the image is recorded to the memory card.
~See Basic Shooting Functions(p. 8)

~See the Advanced Guide to verify the advanced shooting method.
6
Reviewing an Image Right After Shooting
After a shot is taken, the image appears in the LCD monitor for
approximately 2 seconds.
To override this time limit and continue displaying the image, use one of
the following methods:
• Keep the shutter button fully depressed after taking the shot.
• Press the SET or DISP. button while the image is displayed in the LCD
monitor.*
Press the shutter button halfway again to stop displaying it.

* This operation is not available in the Stitch Assist mode (p. 8).
~Seethe Advanced Guide: Ghangingthe ReviewDuration (p.29)
I[l] :O~::~~;~;::~~d:~~~:::::::::~:::: :u:~:I:~: ):not available I pi!

I : ~~~~~~n:i~i;u:~~~:~~:~~:s~::~~~~~.~~t 92). p. I'
I • Attach sound memos (Advanced Guide: p. 102). !
No matter what position the mode dial is in, you can shoot movies with
just a push of the movie button.
• Max. Clip Size: 1 GB* Movie button
• Sound is recorded in stereo.
• Pressing the Movie button again stops
recording.
* Even before the recording size reaches
1 GB, recording will stop at the moment the
recording time reaches 1 hour. Depending
on the storage capacity of the memory card
and the speed at which the data is written,
recording may stop before reaching 1 GB or
1 hour.
~SeetheAdvancedGuide: Shooting aMovie (p.46)

7
Selecting a Shooting Mode
Use the mode dial to select the Shooting modes.
IMode Dial
Image Composition Shooting - - - - -

The camera automatically selects settings
according to the image composition type.
IlmageZone
'i\ Portrait
Blurs the background and makes a
t& Landscape
Shoots spacious landscape scenes.
person stand out.
~ Night Scene Sports
Allows you to capture human subjects Shoots continuous images with
against the backdrop of an evening sky autofocus.
or night scene. The flash is directed at Well suited for shooting moving
the person and the shutter speed is subjects. (The continuous shooting
slow, so both the person and the settings can be changed (Advanced
background can be beautifully shot. Guide: p. 42).)
SeN Special Scene Stitch Assist
8 scene modes to shoot with the most Allows you to shoot overlapping images
appropriate settings for the scene are that can later be merged (stitched) to
available with this camera. create one panoramic image on a
By simply selecting one of the following computer.
shooting modes, the camera selects the ~ See the Advanced Guide(p. 51)
most appropriate settings for the scene.
RJp·9
• • Movie
" Configure settings for shooting movies.
~ • . See the Advanced Guide (p. 46)
8
I Special Scene Items
Turn the mode dial to seN, and use the .... or ~ button to select a
shooting mode.
_ Foliage e Snow
~ Shoots trees and leaves - such as new [: ] Shoots without a blue tinge and without
growth, autumn leaves or blossoms - in making people appear dark against a
vivid colors. snowy background.
m
II Beach
r j Shoots without making people appear
dark near water or sand where reflected
sunlight is strong.
l1li
Fireworks
Captures fireworks in the sky sharply
and at an optimal exposure.
n
M ~!
Color Accent
Allows you to have only the color specified
in the LCD monitor remain and to
transform all others to black and white.
Color Swap
~ Allows you to transform a color specified
in the LCD monitor into another color.
~ •. See the Advanced Guide (p. 54)
~ • See the Advanced Guide (p. 53)
rill Night Snapshot Indoor
~ Allows you to take snapshots of people Prevents camera shake and maintains
against twilight or night backgrounds by the subject's true color when shooting
reducing the effects of camera shake under fluorescent or tungsten lighting.
even without using a tripod.
Some settings can be changed in each shooting mode (Advanced

Guide: p. 167).
• Results may vary depending on the subject.
• In ~, ~ mode, 1',
~, ~ or fI
of SeN mode (depending on
the scene being shot), the ISO speed may increase and cause noise
in the image.
• Observe the following precautions according to the selected function.
You can achieve a better blurring effect of the background by making sure the upper
half of your subject fills the entire LCD monitor.
"
t.
You can enhance the blurring effect of the background even more by setting the lens to
its maximum telephoto setting.
The camera shake warning icon ..A, may appear on the LCD monitor since slower shutter
speeds are frequently used in this mode. If this happens, affix the camera to a tripod.
The shutter speed slows down. Even if you use the flash, tell your subjects not to move
for a few moments.
~ If the Night Scene mode is used to shoot mid-day shots, the same effects as with the
fD) mode can be obtained.
The slow synchro option automatically turns on. Use a tripod to avoid camera shake.
Use when the distance between the front of the lens and the subject is 1 mto infinity
~ (zoom position is at the maximum wide angle setting) 4 mto infinity, (when zoom
position is at the maximum telephoto setting).
II The shutter speed is slow. Always use a tripod to avoid camera shake.

I Movie Mode Items
You can select from 5 different recording pixels/frame rate settings and
shoot movies. The following movie modes are available: Color Accent (for
shooting in black and white except for specified colors), Color Swap (for
changing a specified color into another) of SeN mode and My Colors of
FUNC. menu.
~ See the Advanced Guide: Shooting a Movie (p. 46)
I Creative Zone Items

p Program AE Tv Shutter-speed priority AE
Select this mode to have the camera When you select the shutter speed, the
automatically set the shutter speed and camera automatically sets the aperture.
the aperture. ~See the Advanced Guide (p. 58)
~Seethe Advanced Guide (p.57)
Av Aperture-priority AE
When you select the aperture, the M Manual
Use this mode to select your
camera automatically sets the shutter preferences for the shutter speed and
speed. the aperture.
~Seethe AdvancedGuide(p. 59) ~SeetheAdvanced Guide (p. 60)
C Custom
Allows you to save frequently used
shooting modes and various shooting
OJ settings.
D)
en
n· ~See the Advanced Guide (p. 86)
en
:::r
~ Using the Zoom
~. The zoom can be adjusted from 36 - 432 mm (focal length) in 35mm film
~ equivalent terms. While using the zoom, a zoom bar appears on the LCD
a
o·
monitor.
:::s
en
Press the zoom lever toward IH!I or [tJ.
IH!I Wide Angle Zoom Bar
Zooms out from the
subject (the subjects will
be small).
[tJ Telephoto
Zooms in on the subject.
10
Using the Flash
1 Raise the flash manually, and shoot.

~ Button
Press this button to cycle through flash
settings. (Flash settings cannot be used in
some shooting modes.)
The flash fires with every shot.
The flash will fire automatically.
When the red-eye reduction When the red-eye

function* is on reduction function is off
~A©~ ~© ~A~~
* This feature reduces the effect of light reflecting back from the eyes and making
them appear red (p. 12).
2 When you are not using the flash, lower the flash until it
closes.
The ~ appears in the LCD monitor
(or viewfinder).
rs¥l • ranges are em m

CjJ ft. to 17 ft.) (W) and 90 cm to 4.0 m (3.0 ft. to 13 ft.) (T) (when in ISO
speed is set to Auto, excluding Macro and Super Macro mode (p. 12)).
• The charging time for the flash varies depending on the conditions of
use and remaining battery charge .
• A flashing red ~ in the LCD monitor (or viewfinder) indicates
insufficient light level. In this case, raise the flash before shooting.
However, when shooting with the Tv, Av , or M mode there is no
11
Setting the Red-eye Reduction Function
1 L!1 (Rec.) Menu +- [Red-Eye] •
[On]*/[Off].
See Menus and Settings (p. 15)
* Default setting.
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro/Super Macro)

Use this mode to shoot close-ups of flowers or small items.
(Close-ups cannot be taken in some shooting modes.)
~button
When you press this button, ~ appears on the LCD monitor.
Press and hold this button for more than one second for Super Macro
mode (~ appears on the LCD monitor).
When using the zoom in macro mode, a yellow bar appears below
the zoom bar to indicate the range in which you cannot use macro
mode to shoot the subject.
If the zoom bar enters the yellow bar range, ~ will turn gray.
You can still shoot the image, however, the shot will be taken as if in
standard shooting mode.
The zoom bar disappears after approx. 2 sec.
To cancel the macro mode: press the ,~ button to remove ~~ or ~

from the display.
12
Zoom range for Macro shooting
Focus range
(rough guide)
* Images will be shot in

normal mode and not in
Macro mode (,~ will
appear gray).
I Macro Mode
Shooting distance and image area when shooting as close to the subject
as possible
When shooting as close to the subject as possible
Zoom level Shooting distance Distance between front of
Image area
lens and subject
10 - 50 cm 118 x 87 mm
Maximum wide angle (4.6 x 3.4 in.) 10 cm (3.9 in.)
(3.9 in. -1.6 ft.)
ISuper Macro Mode

Shooting distance and image area when shooting as close to the subject
as possible
When shooting as close to the subject as possible
Zoom level Shooting distance Distance between front of
Image area
lens and subject
Maximum wide angle 0-10 cm 22 x 16 mm
(fixed) (0 - 3.9 in.) (0.87 x 0.63 in.) ocm (0 in.)
13
1 Turn the mode lever to [E] (Playback)
while pressing the release button.
2 Use the'" or ~ button to select the image.

• Use the ..... button to move to the previous image
and the ~ button to move the next image.
• Holding the button down advances the images more rapidly, but shows
them less clearly.
~See the Advanced Guide to verify the advanced playback
~SeetheAdvancedGuide:.VjeWin9/Movies (p.95)
'/ , , ' , " " , " " , ;Z'1: ' '"' J' 1', ", :"%~;
Ii.lllli.,g , "",,', , ' ':

1 Turn the mode lever to [E] (Playback)
while pressing the release button.
"tJ
~ 2 Use the'" or ~ button to select

~ the image you wish to erase
~ and press the 16ff button ((1).
OJ
~. 3 Confirm that [Erase] is
(Q selected (@) and press the SET
button (@).
• To exit instead of erasing, select
[Cancel] using the ..... or ~ button.
1.1i¥I P~otec!ed ima.ges cannot be erased

l LjJ with this function
! (Advanced Guide: p. 109)
~See the Advanced Guide: Erasing Allimages(p. 110)

Please note that erased images cannot be recovered. Exercise adequate caution
before erasing an image.
14
Settings during shooting and playback and such camera settings as the
print, date/time, and sound settings are set using the FUNC., Rec., Play,
Print, Set up, or My Camera menus.
IFUNC. Menu
From this menu you can specify recording pixels, compression, and other settings for
shooting.
When the camera is set to shooting mode, press the FUNC. button (CD).
To select an item (@)

Press the'" or T button.
To change the setting (@)
Press the ..... or ~ button .
• You can select further options with the SET button for some options .
• After selecting an option, you can press the shutter button to shoot immediately.
After shooting, this menu will appear again, allowing you to adjust the settings easily.
l
When you finish making settings
Press the FUNC. button.
~ Seethe Advanced Guide: FUNC.Menu, Menulist(p.28)
15
I Rec.lPlay/PrintlSet upl My Camera Menus
You can specify settings related to camera functions from these menus:
[C!] Rec. Menu], [[g] Play Menu], [a!D
Print Menu], [iii
Set up Menu],
and [Em My Camera Menu].
From shooting mode
To switch between menu~ (CD)

When the menu icon is selected, press the
.... or ~ button, or press the zoom lever.
To select an item (@)

Press the ... or T button.
To change the setting (@)

Press the .... or ~ button.
When"..." appears by an item, press the SET
button to display the set up screen, and then use
the ... , T, .... or ~ button to change the settings.
When you finish making settings

Press the MENU button.
Press the MENU button.
~ See the Advanced Guide: Menus and Settings (p. 26)
16
Connect the camera to a direct print compatible printer*1 with a cable and
simply press the ~¢VI button.
1 Connect the camera to a Canon Direct Print compatible

printer and turn on the printer's power.
Canon Brand Printers
SELPHY CP Series Compact
mJ
Photo Printers*2
o
.·C .. .. ' a
....:-C'CAD
~~
Interface Cable
..
Camera
PIXMA Series/SELPHY OS Series

Bubble Jet Printers
*1 Since this camera uses a standard protocol (PictBridge), you can use it with other
PictBridge-compliant printers in addition to Canon-brand printers.
*2 You can also use card photo printers such as the CP-10/CP-100/CP-200/CP-300.
2 Turn on the camera in Playback mode. Confirm that ~, rn or

[!j is displayed in the upper left of the LCD monitor ((1)).
• The ~¢VI button lights blue .
• The displayed icon will vary according to the printer model.
3 Select an image to print with the ~ or ~ button (@) and press

the ~¢VI button (@).
The ~¢VI button will blink blue and printing will start.
~ See the Advanced Guide: Setting the DPOF Print Settings (p. 111)
~See the Direct Print User Guide
~See the user guide for Your Printer
17
The following methods can be used to download images recorded by the
camera to a computer. Some methods, depending on the as used, may
not be available. Please read System Requirements (p. 19) in advance.
I Camera to Computer Connection
•
c
o
:e::::s
•
0'
D)
c. Computer System
5" Requirements
(Q
3"
D)
(Q
C'D
tn
Connecting
the Camera to a
I• Basic Guide (p. 21) I
o
D)
Computer .- - - - - - - - - - - - - • Windows ® XPand
Mac as x Users
n leaflet
o
3 Downloading Images
"C
r:: to a Computer
~
I Using a Memory Card Reader

A memory card reader can be used with all the operating systems listed
above. Refer to the Software Starter Guide for details.
18
System Requirements
Please install the software on a computer meeting the following minimum
requirements.
(Windows)
Windows 98 Second Edition (SE)
Windows Me
Windows 2000 Service Pack 4
Windows XP (including Service Pack 1 and Service Pack 2)
The above as should be pre-installed on computers with built-in
USB ports.
Pentium 500MHz or higher processor
Windows 98 SElWindows Me 128 MB or more
Windows 2000IWindows XP 256 MB or more
USB
• Canon Utilities
- ZoomBrowser EX 200 MB or more c
- PhotoStitch 40 MB or more o
• Canon Camera TWAIN Driver 25 MB or more :E
~
• Canon Camera WIA Driver 25 MB or more 0'
DJ
• ArcSoft PhotoStudio 50 MB or more Q.
1,024 x 768 pixels/High Color (16 bit) or better 5'
cc
3'
DJ
cc
CD
tJ)
Mac as X (v1 0.2-v1 0.4)
The above as should be pre-installed on computers with built-in
o
DJ
USB ports. o
PowerPC G3/G4/G5 o
3
256 MB or more "C
USB S
~
• Canon Utilities
- ImageBrowser 200 MB or more
- PhotoStitch 40 MB or more
• ArcSoft PhotoStudio 50 MB or more
1,024 x 768 pixels/32,000 Colors or better
19

Preparing to Download Images
Ensure that you install the software first before connecting the camera to the
computer.
I Items to Prepare
• Camera and computer
• Canon Digital Camera Solution Disk supplied with the camera
• Interface cable supplied with the camera (always use the supplied interface
cable)
1 Install the software.

1. Place the Canon Digital Camera Solution Disk in the computer's
CD-ROM drive.
c Double-click th.~[Canon Digital Camera

o
:E Installer] icon (~) in the CD-ROM window.
~
0" the installer panel appears, click [Install].
l»
Q.
:i'
cc
3"
l»
cc
(1)
Installer panel
UI
o 2. Click [Easy Installation].
l» !_ _ __ __' _
n
~ ' N _ ' ~ ' _ ~ ~ ~ ~ ' ~ f f ~ ~ ' ~ N ~ ' _ ' " N _ N ~
o !IMmmmtU1
3 ISelect [Easy Installation] as the setup type
"C
s:: Iand click [Next].
~ ~,_~~~_""""",""~~/N"'~_'-'_,*", __Wh¥_",;,..WNN"",",""~Nn"",,,,,_
Proceed with the installation, confirming the

contents as you proceed.
3. When the installation is finished, the

[Finish] or [Restart] button appears. Click
the one that appears.
~ 'HH~NhhW''''_~'''.b~~'~ _ _-''''>'MtI,
IM$11i1mn ,.
IWhen t~e ins~alla~~~~~~,~sh~,:w~N:~_ [E~~~:,pJ
4. When the screen returns to the desktop display, remove the Canon
Digital Camera Solution Disk from the CD-ROM drive.
20
2 Connecting the camera to a computer.
1. Use the supplied interface cable to connect the computer's USB
port to the camera's DIGITAL terminal.
With your fingernail on the upper edge of the camera's DIGITAL terminal
cover, pull it forward to open it, and plug the interface cable in all the way.
USB Port
~1------,,-----
DIGITAL Terminal
c
o
:e
~
0"
D)
c.
~.
When the power is turned on automatically, the camera and computer (Q
will be able to communicate. (The LCD monitor or viewfinder turns off,
and the power/mode indicator lights yellow.)
3
D)
(Q
CD
tn
Signature Not Found" window appears, click [Yes].

automatically finish installing onto the computer when you attach
camera and open a connection.
21
( Windows) Downloading Images to a Computer
A window allowing you to set the preferences will appear when a
connection is established between the camera and computer.
1 Select [Canon CameraWindow] and f
click [OK] (first time only).

t%.
"'IP
~,.
·.~cancel!
-
2 Download the images.
f •~~~~~~~::~
Downloading Images
Using the Camera (p. 24)
images using the camera or
g • By default, the downloaded images are saved

~ into the [My Pictures] folder.
cc
3"
D)
cc Downloading images using a computer
CD
en by default, all images that have yet to be
0- downloaded will download.
D)
(")
o
3 You can set the type of image to
'C
S. download and the destination
~
Thumbnails (small versions) of the downloaded
images will display in the ZoomBrowser EX
Main Window. By default, the downloaded
images are saved into subfolders according to
their shooting dates.
Thumbnails
22
I~'~mhnimn Downloading Images to a Computer
The following window opens when you establish a connection between
the camera and computer. If it fails to appear, click the [Canon
CameraWindow] icon on the Dock (the bar that displays at the bottom of
the desktop).

• Download the images using the camera or the computer.
• By default, all the images that have yet to be downloaded will download
to the [Pictures] folder.
Downloading Images Using

the Camera (p. 24)
Downloading images using a computer

by default, all images that have yet to
downloaded will download.
can set the type of image to

download and the destination folder.
Thumbnails (small versions) of

the downloaded images will
display in the ImageBrowser
Browser Window. By default,
the downloaded images are
saved into folders according to
their shooting dates.
Thumbnails
23
Downloading Images Using the Camera
(Direct Transfer)
When communication between the ~¢V' button

camera and computer is enabled, the
~¢V' button will light blue and the
Direct Transfer menu is displayed on
the camera's LCD monitor.
At this point, images can be
transferred using camera operations.
r5¥llf the Direct Transfer menu is no

L:IIdisplayed, press the ~¢VI
button.
o You can select the following methods in the Direct Transfer menu.
D)
(") ~. All Images Transfers and saves all images to the computer.
o
3 Transfers and saves to the computer only the images that
"C
r::::
Ie New Images have not been previously transferred.
~ Transfers and saves to the computer only the images with
~ DPOF Trans. Images DPOF Transfer Order settings (Advanced Guide: Setting the
DPOF Transfer Settings (p. 114).
-= Select & Transfer

Transfers and saves single images to the computer as you
view and select them.
Transfers and saves single images to the computer as you
l!!J] Wallpaper view and select them. The transferred images display on the
computer desktop.
24
IAII Images/New Images/DPOF Trans. Images
Select ~, II: or ~ (CD) with the
... or ... button and press the ~¢Vf
button (@).
The images will download. The ~¢Vf

button will blink blue while downloading
is in progress.
To cancel the download, press the SET
button.
The display will return to the Direct
Transfer menu when the download is complete.
ISelect & TransferlWalipaper

1 Select -= or l!!J] with the ... or'" button (CD) and press the ~¢Vf
button (@) (or the SET button).
2 Select images to download with the ..... or ~ button and press
the ~¢Vf button (@) (or the SET button).
The images will download.
The ~¢Vf button will blink blue while downloading is in progress.
Images can also be selected during index playback.
3 Press the MENU button (@).

The display will return to the Direct Transfer menu.
[QI camera's power is turned off.

The previous setting will be in effect the next time the Direct Transfer
menu is displayed. If the [Select & Transfer] or [Wallpaper] option was
selected last, the image selection screen will appear immediately.
25
Safety Precautions
Be sure to read, understand and follow the safety precautions below when
using the camera, in order to prevent injury, burns or electrical shock to yourself
and others.
• Do not trigger the flash in close proximity to human or animal eyes.

• Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.
• Avoid dropping or subjecting the camera to severe impacts. Do not touch
the flash portion of the camera if it has been damaged.
• Stop operating the equipment immediately if it emits smoke or noxious
fumes.
• Do not handle the power cord if your hands are wet.
• Only use batteries recommended in this manual.
• The output terminal for the compact power adaptor is made specifically for
this camera. Do not use it with any other device.
• Never rub or press strongly on the LCD monitor. These actions may
damage it or lead to other problems.
Canon
CDI-E214-01A 0406CH55 © 2006 CANON INC. PRINTED IN JAPAN

Canon ~llI.~1IJ,I1 1 1 1I1 I1 1 "" IIII
HlNerShot S3 IS
DIGITAL CAMERA
( Before Using the Camera •
(Shooting •
[ Using the Mode Dial •
( Advanced Shooting Functions.
( Playback/Erasing •
( Print SettingslTransfer Settings.
f Viewing Images on a TV set
Customizing the Camera
Troubleshooting/List of Messages
~APpendiX
Camera User Guide

This guide explains camera features and procedures in detail.
DiG!CII t( ~ rI . .....~
PietBridge D1RECf BUBBLE JET Exit Ptmt
t"j ~
~
DPOF
PRINT DIREa

Main Features
Shooting
• Automatically adjusts shooting settings to match particular
conditions
• Reduces blurriness with an image stabilizer function
• Shoot in high-speed ISO with reduced blurriness from hand or
subject movement
• Shoot movies in any mode by pressing the movie button
• Shoots movies with stereo sound
• Automatically detects camera orientation with an Intelligent
Orientation sensor
• Attach the separately sold wide converter, tele-converter lens,
or close-up lens to shoot
Playback
• Plays movies with stereo
sound
• Auto plays slide shows
Editing
• Adds effects to still images
with My Colors
• Records sound memos for
still images
• Edits movies
• Records sound only (sound
recorder)
Printing
• Makes printing easy with the PrinUShare button
• Also supports non-Canon PictBridge compliant
printers
Uses of Recorded Images

• Effortlessly transfer them to a computer with the Print/Share
button

IConventions Used in this Guide
Icons appearing below titles indicate the modes in which the
procedure can be used. In the example below, the mode dial can be
used in the following shooting modes.
• f!gID (Auto) • r::Q (Stitch Assist)
. " (Portrait) • -" (Movie)
• ~ (Landscape) • P (Program AE)
• ~ (Night Scene) • Tv (Shutter-speed priority AE)
• " (Sports) • Av (Aperture-priority AE)
• SeN (Special Scene) • M (Manual)
• See Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode (p. 167).
o· This mark denotes issues that may affect the camera's

operation.
r5¥l. This mark denotes additional topics that complement the
L..iJ basic operating procedures.
You can use SO* memory cards and MultiMediaCards with this
camera. These cards are collectively called memory cards in this
guide.
* SD stands for Secure Digital, a copyright protection system.
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.

This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when
used with genuine Canon accessories. Canon shall not be liable for
any damage to this product and/or accidents such as fire, etc.,
caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g.,
a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this
warranty does not apply to repairs arising' out of the malfunction of
non-genuine Canon accessories, although you may request such
repairs on a chargeable basis.

·1 Contents
Items marked with a l::r
are lists or charts that summarize camera
functions or procedures.
Please Read. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Preventing Malfunctions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Using the LCD Monitor and the Viewfinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Customizing Display Information 17
Information Displayed on the LCD Monitor 20
Power Saving Function 23
Setting the World Clock 24
T:r Menus and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
T:r Menu List 28
Resetting Settings to Their Default Values 34
Formatting Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Changing the Recording Pixels and Compression (Still Images) .... 36

Setting the Slow Synchro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Setting the Image Stabilizer Function 39
Magnified Close-Up Shooting (Super Macro) 40
Using the Digital Zoom 41
Qh Continuous Shooting 42
~ Using the Self-Timer 43
." Movie Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

d;I Shooting Panoramic Images (Stitch Assist) 51
SeN Changing the Colors and Shooting 53

Shooting in the Creative Zone 57
P Program AE
Tv Setting the Shutter Speed
Av Setting the Aperture
M Manually Setting the Shutter Speed and Aperture
~ Registering Settings to the Shortcut Button 61

EEl Selecting an AF Frame 63
Shooting Hard-to-Focus Subjects
(Focus Lock, AF Lock, Manual Focus) ' 64
Switching between Focus Settings 67
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode) 68
ISO Adjusting the ISO Speed 69
Locking the Exposure Setting (AE Lock) 70
Shooting with FE Lock 72
Switching between Metering Modes 73
Adjusting the Exposure Compensation 75
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Mode) 76
Adjusting the Tone (White Balance) : 77
Shooting in a My Colors Mode 80
~ Switching between Flash Adjustment Settings 82
Compensating the Flash Adjustment/Flash Output. 82
Switching the Timing at which the Flash Fires 83
Shooting Images at Set Intervals (Intervalometer) 84
C Saving Custom Settings 86
Setting the Auto Rotate Function 87
Creating an Image Destination (Folder) 88
Resetting the File Number 90
~ Viewing Magnified Images .

~ Viewing Images in Sets of Nine (Index Playback) 93
!b Jumping to Images 94
Viewing Movies 95
Editing Movies 96
Rotating Images in the Display 98
Applying Effects and Playing Back 99
Adding My Colors Effects 100
t Attaching Sound Memos to Images 102
Sound-Only Recording (Sound Recorder) 103

Automated Playback (Slide Shows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Protecting Images 109
Erasing All Images '. 110
Setting the DPOF Print Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Setting the DPOF Transfer Settings 114
Camera 120
When the power is turned on 121
LCD monitorNiewfinder 121
Shooting 122
Shooting Movies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
TV monitor output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Direct print compatible printers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Battery Handling ' 132

Handling the Memory Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Replacing the Date Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Using the Power Kits (Sold Separately) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Using Conversion Lenses (Sold Separately) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Using an Externally Mounted Flash (Sold Separately) . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Camera Care and Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 146

IHandling Precautions
Please Read
Test Shots
Before you try to photograph important subjects, we highly
recommend that you shoot several trial images to confirm that the
camera is operating and being operated correctly.
Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries and affiliates, and its
distributors are not liable for any consequential damages arising from
any malfunction of a camera or accessory, including memory cards,
that results in the failure of an image to be recorded or to be recorded
in a way that is machine readable.
Warning Against Copyright Infringement
Please note that Canon digital cameras are intended for personal use
and should never be used in a manner that infringes upon or
contravenes international or domestic copyright laws and regUlations.
Please be advised that in certain cases the copying of images from
performances, exhibitions, or commercial properties by means of a
camera or other device may contravene copyright or other legal
rights even if the image was shot for personal use.
Warranty Limitations
This camera's warranty is only effective in the country of sale. If a
problem arises while the camera is in use abroad, please convey it
back to the country of sale before proceeding with a warranty claim to a
Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
For Canon Customer Support contacts, please see the customer
support list supplied with your camera.

Video Format
Please set the camera's video signal format to the one used in your
region before using it with a TV monitor (p. 116).
Language Setting
Please see the Bas;c Guide (p. 5) to change the language setting.
Safety Precautions
• Before using the camera, please ensure that you read and
understand the safety precautions described below. Always ensure
that the camera is operated correctly.
• The safety precautions noted on the following pages are intended
to instruct you in the safe and correct operation of the camera and
its accessories to prevent injuries or damage to yourself, other
persons and equipment.
• Equipment refers to the camera, battery, battery charger (sold
separately), compact power adapter (sold separately) or Externally
Mounted Flash (sold separately).

.A Warnings
• Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.

Accidental damage by a child could result in serious injury.
• Neck strap: Placement of the strap around the child's neck could
result in asphyxiation.
• Memory card: If swallowed accidentally, contact a doctor
immediately.
• Do not attempt to disassemble or alter any part of the
equipment that is not expressly described in this guide.
• To avoid the risk of high-voltage electrical shock, do not
touch the flash portion of the camera if it has been damaged.
• Stop operating the equipment immediately if it emits smoke
or noxious fumes.
• Do not allow the equipment to come into contact with, or
become immersed in, water or other liquids. If the exterior
comes into contact with liquids or salt air, wipe it dry with a
soft, absorbent cloth.
Continued use of the equipment may result in fire or electrical
shock.
Immediately turn the camera power off and remove the camera
battery or unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Please
consult your camera distributor or the closest Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
• Do not use substances containing alcohol, benzine, thinners
or other flammable substances to clean or maintain the
equipment.
• Do not cut, damage, alter or place heavy items on the power cord.
• Use only recommended power accessories.
• Remove the power cord on a regular periodic basis and wipe away
the dust and dirt that collects on the plug, the exterior of the power
outlet and the surrounding area.
• Do not handle the power cord if your hands are wet.
Continued use of the equipment may result in fire or electrical
shock.

• Do not place the battery near a heat source or expose it to
direct flame or heat.
• The battery should not be immersed in water.
• Do not attempt to disassemble, alter or apply heat to the
battery.
• Avoid dropping or subjecting the batteries to severe impacts
that could damage the casing.
• Use only recommended batteries and accessories.
Use of batteries not expressly recommended for this equipment
may cause explosions or leaks, resulting in fire, injury and damage
to the surroundings. In the event that a battery leaks and the eyes,
mouth, skin or clothing contact these substances, immediately flush
with water and seek medical assistance.
• Disconnect the battery charger and compact power adapter
from both the camera and the power outlet after recharging or
when they are not in use to avoid fire and other hazards.
• Do not place anything, such as tablecloths, carpets, bedding
or cushions, on top of the battery charger while it is charging.
Continued use over a long period may cause the units to overheat
and distort, resulting in fire.
• Please use Canon AA-size NiMH batteries and charger
recommended for use with these batteries.
• The compact power adapter are designed for exclusive use
with your camera. Do not use it with other products or
batteries.
There is a risk of overheating and distortion which could result in fire
or electrical shock.
• Before you discard a battery, cover the terminals with tape or
other insulators to prevent direct contact with other objects.
Contact with the metallic components of other materials in waste
containers may lead to fire or explosions.

• Do not trigger the flash in close proximity to human or animal
eyes. Exposure to the intense light produced by the flash may
damage eyesight.
In particular, remain at least one meter (39 inches) away from
infants when using the flash.
• Keep objects that are sensitive to magnetic fields (such as
credit cards) away from the speaker of the camera.
Such items may lose data or stop working.
• When using the optional Canon Wide Converter, Tele
Converter, Close-up Lens, or Conversion Lens Adaptor, be
sure to attach them firmly.
If the lens becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the shards
of glass may lead to cuts.

A Cautions
• Do not get the camera caught on other objects or subject it to

strong impacts or shocks when wearing or holding it by the
neck strap.
Doing so may result in injury or damage to the camera.
• Do not store the equipment in humid or dusty areas.
• Do not allow metal objects (such as pins or keys) or dirt to
contact the charger terminals or plug.
Such conditions could lead to fire, electrical shock or other damage.
• Avoid using, placing or storing the equipment in places
subject to strong sunlight or high temperatures, such as the
dashboard or trunk (boot) of a car.
• Do not use the camera in such a way that would cause it to
exceed the rating of the power outlet or wiring. Do not use if
the power cord or plug are damaged, or if not fully plugged
into the outlet.
• Do not use in locations with poor ventilation.
The above-mentioned can cause leakage, overheating or explosion,
resulting in fire, burns or other injuries. High temperatures may also
cause deformation of the casing.
• When not using the camera for extended periods of time,
remove the battery from the camera or battery charger and
store the equipment in a safe place.
Storing the camera for extended periods with batteries installed will
cause battery leakage and damage the camera.
10

• Do not operate the flash with dirt, dust or other items stuck to
the surface of the flash.
• Be careful not to cover the flash with your fingers or clothing
when shooting.
The flash may be damaged and emit smoke or noise. The resulting
heat build-up could damage the flash.
• Do not touch the surface of the flash after taking several
pictures in rapid succession.
Doing so could result in burns.
Preventing Malfunctions
• When moving the equipment rapidly between hot and cold

temperatures, you can avoid condensation by placing the
equipment in an airtight, resealable plastic bag and letting it
adjust to temperature changes slowly before removing it from
the bag.
Moving the equipment rapidly between hot and cold temperatures
may cause condensation (water droplets) to form on its external and
internal surfaces.
• Stop using the camera immediately.

Continued use may damage the equipment. Remove the memory
card and battery or compact power adapter from the camera and
wait until the moisture evaporates completely before resuming use.
11

Before Using the Camera •The Components -Guide
Front View
CD Neck Strap Mounts

® Self-timer Lamp/Tally Lamp/Red-eye Reduction Lamp (pp. 43, 46, 28)
@ Flash (Basic Guide p. 11)
@ Microphone (R) (pp. 102, 103)
® Microphone (L) (pp. 102, 103)
® AF-assist Beam (p. 28)
(j) Lens
® Ring Release Button (p. 141)
® Tripod Socket (p. 143)
@J Battery Cover (Basic Guide p. 1)
® Memory Card Slot Cover (Basic Guide p. 1)
@ Terminal Cover
@ DIGITAL Terminal (Basic Guide p. 21)
@ DC IN Terminal (p. 139)
12

Attaching the Neck Strap
Attach the strap as illustrated.
Check that the strap does not
come loose from the strap
mount when pulled. Perform
the same steps on the other
side of the camera.
II
lXJ
(I)
0'
Attaching the Lens Cap CiJ
Fit the lens cap over the lens
c:
fA
casing so that it covers the S·
CQ
entire lens. ,..
Always replace the lens cap :s-
(I)
after use. or»
3
(I)
~ • Attach the lens cap cord to the strap. Dl

UJ • Remove the lens cap before turning on the camera's -I
power. :s-
(I)
oo
3
"a
o
::J
(I)
::J
en
G')
c::
~
(I)
13

Back View
CD ~ (Flash)/\fJ (Microphone) Button (pp. 102, 103, Basic Guide p. 11)

® Mode Dial (p. 46, Basic Guide p. 8)
® Shutter Button (Basic Guide p. 6)
@Zoom Lever
Shooting: [.J (Telephoto)/IH!! (Wide Angle) (p. 41, Basic Guide p. 10)
Playback: Q. (Zoom in)/~ (Zoom out) (p. 92)
® Q (Continuous)/~ (Self-timer) Button (pp. 42, 43)
® Power/Mode Indicator
Orange: Shooting mode Green: Playback mode/Printer connection
Yellow: Computer connection
(j) OFF Button
® Mode Lever (Basic Guide p. 3)
® AN OUT (audio/video output) terminal (p. 116)
@ Terminal Cover
@ LCD Monitor (Basic Guide p. 2)
@ Speaker
@ ~ (Macro) Button (Basic Guide p. 12)
@ MF (Manual Focus) Button (p. 66)
14

Operation Panel
II
CD Diopter Adjustment Dial (p. 16)

® Viewfinder (p. 16) -I
® Movie Button (p. 46, Basic Guide p. 7)
::r
CD
@ Orrmi Selector o
o
A(Up) T(Down)
.... (Left) ~(Right) 3
"'C
® Indicator o
~
Blinking Red: Recording to memory card/Reading memory card/ Erasing CD
~
from memory cardlTransmitting data (during a computer connection)
® MENU Button (p. 26, Basic Guide p. 16) Cit
G)
(j) SET/I±) (AF Frame Selector) Button (p. 63, Basic Guide p. 15) c
® DISP. Button (p. 16) is:
CD
® J§] (Shortcut)/~iN' (Print/Share) Button (p. 61, Basic Guide pp. 17,24)
@ ISO (ISO Speed)/fC (Jump) Button (pp. 69, 94)
® FUNC. (Function)/~(Single Image Erase) Button (p. 26,
Basic Guide pp. 15, 14)
15

I Before Using the Camera • Operations
Using the LCD Monitor and the Viewfinder
Pressing the DISP. button switches the display mode.
The screens that are displayed are based on the [Custom Display]
settings (p. 17).
Also, closing the LCD monitor causes the viewfinder to display.
1 Press the DISP. button.

• The display mode changes as follows.
Shooting Mode (CI) Playback Mode ([E)
When the LCD monitor is opened.
(Default setting)
LCD Monitor Display
(No Information) No Information
LCD Mon!r Display'1
•
(Information View) Standard Display
Viewfinder Display Detailed Display
•
(No Information)
*2 *2
Viewfinder Display *1
(Information View)
*1 Shooting information, grid lines, and a histogram (P, Tv, Av , arid
M only). are displayed with the default settings.
*2 When the LCD monitor is closed.
• In the shooting modes, the shooting information displays for
approximately 6 sec. when settings such as the flash setting are
changed, regardless of the selected display mode.
• You can adjust the brightness for the LCD monitor (or
viewfinder) (p. 31).
• If the surroundings are too bright (for example, when you are
shooting outdoors) and images on the LCD monitor are not
clear, use the viewfinder for shooting. Adjust the viewfinder
focus (p. 20) with the diopter adjustment dial (p. 15) so the
displayed information appears clearly.
16

Ii¥l • The LCD monitor and viewfinder display settings are
LjJ remembered even after the camera power is turned off.
• The LCD monitor will not switch to the detailed display in the
index playback mode (p. 93).
Customizing Display Information

You can select whether or not to display the following information on
the LCD monitor and viewfinder in the current shooting mode, and
switch between displays by pressing the DISP. button.
• Shooting info. II
m
• Grid Lines (I)
• Histogram * (p. 19) 0'
* P Tv , Av, and M only
I ;
c:
1 L!J (Rec.) Menu .. [Custom tn
:i.
Display]. (c .
.....
See Menus and Settings (p. 27) :::r
(I)
o
D)
3
..,D)
(I)
2 [LCDNiewfinder] .. iJ*/i1*/~*1
*
~.
• Using the ... , T, .... , and ~ buttons,
select the LCD monitor or viewfinder
you wish to display information for
when the DISP. button is pressed, and
press the SET button to place a -/
mark.
• You cannot disable the display setting
of the currently selected display
Currently selected
location. display location
• Display locations marked with ~ do
not display even when the DISP.
button is pressed.
* Default settings.
17

3 [Shooting Info]*/[Grid Lines]*/ Does not display when the
[Histogramf. DISP. button is pressed
• Using the . , T, ~, and ~ buttons,
select the items you wish to display on
the LCD monitor or viewfinder, and
press the SET button to place a -/
mark.
• Display locations with no -/ marks will
not have any information displayed.
• Even though items that are greyed out
can be set, they will not display in this
shooting mode.
* Default setting: ~, ~: No Information
iJ, i): Displays shooting information, grid lines,
and a histogram
18

Histogram
The histogram is a graph that allows you to judge the brightness of
an image, and you can display it in the P, Tv, Av, and M modes
to confirm the brightness while shooting. The greater the bias
toward the left in the graph, the darker the image. The greater the
bias toward the right, the brighter the image. If the image is too
dark, adjust the exposure compensation to a positive value.
Similarly, adjust the exposure compensation to a negative value if
the image is too bright (p. 75).
Sample Histograms
II
~
Dark Image
~
Balanced Image
~
Bright Image
I¥Iln addition to adjusting the exposure compensation, you can

L..iJ also decrease the shutter speed and aperture value to create
a brighter image. Similarly, you can increase the shutter
speed and aperture value to create a darker image.
Night Display
When shooting in dark conditions, the camera automatically
brightens the LCD monitor or viewfinder to suit the brightness of the o
-c
sUbject*, making it easier to frame the subject.
* Noise will appear and the movements of the subject will appear irregular in
the LCD monitor. The recorded image, however, will not be affected. The
brightness of the image displayed in the monitor and the brightness of the
..o·
..,CD
Do)
::s
tn
actual image recorded will differ. (This function cannot be disabled.)
19
Information Displayed on the LCD Monitor
Shooting mode
~~~~~~
[ ]"1 Spot Frame 80 100 200 400 800 HI
ISO Speed (p. 69)
D~~C1O~1~"C
Drive Mode (pp. 42, 43)
~ ~ Macro/Super Macro
(p. 40, Basic Guide p. 12)
~A@ ~ @
Flash (Basic Guide p. 11)
C Q D Auto Rotate (p. 87)

!---------; • Rec (Red)*1
Movie Recording (p. 46)
IID~~~~EB
rJIIMl'~rlE
~*1 Ii1I1r!Jmll
Shooting Modes (p. 46, Basic Guide p. 8)
~ Save Settings (p. 86)
~, *1 Wind Filter (OFF) (p. 50)
-2 ... +2 Exposure Compensation (p. 75) ~ Time Zone (p. 24)
~~: .a ~!; ** *Pi

White Balance (WB) (p. 77)
~ ~A t!i *1 Folder Creation (p. 88)
t?i Shooting prohibited (p. 49)
8v 8N ~e qW 8p 8L
808S8G8R8c
My Colors (p. 80)
* *1 AE Lock/FE Lock (pp. 70, 72)
Shutter Speeds*1 (p. 58)
~ ~ Bracket (pp. 68, 76) Aperture value*1 (p. 59)
~ Flash Adjust (p. 82) 1M] *1

Flash Output (p. 82) Manual Focus (p. 66)
E!)J [J [eJ Metering Method (p. 73) ~
Exposure Shift Bar (Movie) (p. 47)
640,640,320,320,320,
L30 L.15 L60 L30 L.15
Movie Recording Pixels/Frame Rate (p. 48)
(t» «@» «+l) ((If, «(!'~
((~«~«~)«~)
jS1 ~ .III Compression (p. 36) Image Stabilizer (p. 39)*1
L M1M2 S (W Recording Pixels (p. 36) Int. Intervalometer (p. 84)*1
A (Redf1 Camera Shake Warning (p. 21) AFL *1 AF Lock (p. 65)
20

*1 Appears even if the LCD monitor is set to display no information.
*2 Appears when selected in [Custom Display] (p. 17).
*3 This is not normally displayed. It appears when remaining available internal
memory (buffer) is half or less during movie recording.
When the buffer warning indicates full, shooting or recording may be stopped.
*4 "0" appears in red when no more recording space is available for either still
images at the current number of recordable images, or movies. When both
recording capacities are full, the "Memory card full" message appears.
Ii¥I • Even in the no information display mode, shooting information

L..iJ appears for approximately 6 seconds when changing
shooting settings. (Shooting information may not appear
depending on the camera settings at that time.)
• The "Raise the flash" message, fl (camera shake warning),
II
or @ (flash warning) icon appears in red on the LCD monitor
(or viewfinder) in low light conditions while the camera is
preparing to shoot. Use one of the following shooting
methods.
- Turn the Image Stabilizer function on (p. 39)
- Raise the ISO speed
- Raise the flash to enable automatic or normal firing
- Fix the camera to a tripod
Playback Mode
Standard
o
"C
..o·
(I)
DJ
~
~~.II tn
Compression (Still image) (p. 36)
L M1 M2 S 00
Recording Pixels (Still image) (p. 36)
AVI
Movie (p. 46)
Shooting Date/Time
Total number of images

Displayed image number
21
Detailed
HI-2' ,,+2
Exposure Compensation (p. 75)
-.t ~
Macro/Super Macro (p. 40, Basic Guide p. 12)
SVSN ~e qW Sp SL So Ss SG SR ~
SA Ss
My Colors (Shooting) (p. 80)
Sv~ ~e qW Sp SL So Ss SG SR
Histogram (p. 19) My Colors (Playback) (p. 100)
__-=----..,...--------1 [~J [J [e]

rmIDl"
t& ~ ~ ~ ~ Metering Method (p. 73)
~.hh~~~ m~.~~~~~
-" P Tv Av M I-W_h_it_e_Ba_la_nc_e_(p_._77_) -I
Shooting Modes ~ -2 ... +2

(pp. 53, 54, 46, 57, Basic Guide p. 8) Flash Adjust (p. 82)
.~ Still image shot while shooting a movie Flash Output (p. 82)
1\(p. 49) I-lMB-F-Ma-n-ua-1-Fo-cu-s-(p-.6-6-)- - - - - - 1
gJ Image with the My Colors effect (p. 100) Shutter speed (p. 58)
II;ISO 1I;I1OO 1I;1200 1I;1400 II;ISOO I-A-p-ert-u-re-v-alu-e-(p-.-59-)- - - - - - - 1
II;I HI
ISO Speed (p. 69)
File size
1-- -1
~~1(6Q1(301IT5 Shooting Recording Pixels (Still) (p. 36)

Movie recording Pixels/Frame Rate (p. 48) Shooting Time (Movie) (p. 48)
The following information may also be displayed with some images.

~ A sound file in a format other than the WAVE format is attached, or the file
format is not recognized.
A JPEG image not conforming to Design rule for Camera File System Standards
(p.148).
a RAW image
tJ Unrecognized data type.
22

Ii¥l •
Information for images shot on other cameras may not display
LjI correctly.
• Overexposure Warning
In the following cases, overexposed portions of the image
blink.
- When reviewing an image right after shooting in the LCD
monitor (information view) or in the viewfinder (information
view)
- When using the detailed display mode of the Playback mode
Power Saving Function II

D:J
(I)
This camera is equipped with a power saving function.
0'
The power will shut off in the following circumstances. Press the
power button again to restore power.
a
c:
Shooting Mode Powers down approximately 3 minutes after the last control is en
S·
input on the camera. [Display Off] activates and the LCD (or (Q
viewfinder) automatically turns off 1 minute* after the last ,...
::T
control is input, even if [Auto Power Down] is set to [Off]. (To (I)
turn the LCD monitor back on, press any button other than the o
Q)
OFF button, or change the vertical or horizontal orientation.)
3
Playback Mode or Powers down approximately 5 minutes after the last control is (I)
Connected to a Printer input on the camera. SiJ

* Default setting (time can be changed).
Ii¥l •
Please note that when the power is turned off with the power
LjI saving function, small amounts of power are still consumed.
• The power saving function does not activate during automatic
slide show playback or while the camera is connected to a
computer.
• The power saving function settings can be changed (p. 31).
23

Setting the World Clock
When traveling abroad, you can record images with local dates and
times simply by switching the time zone setting if you pre-register the
destination time zones. You can enjoy the convenience of not having
to switch the DatelTime settings.
Setting the HomelWorld Time Zones

1 iii (Set up) Menu. [Time Zone].
2 ~ (Home) .. SET button. TIme Zone
3 Use the ..... or ~ button to select a home time zone from

the map .. SET button.
• To set the daylight saving option, use the
... Of T button to display 6.
The time
will advance by 1 hOUf.
4 &t (World) .. SET button .. select a destination time

zone as same as step 3.
24

SWitching to the Destination Time Zone
1 iii (Set up) Menu" [Time Zone].
2 Use the .... or ~ button to select &t (World) .. MENU

button.
• To change the destination time zone, use the SET button.
II
OJ
CD
rifllf you change the date and time when the World option is 0'
L.jJ selected, the Home date and time will also change CiJ
automatically. c:
en
:i"
..
(Q
:::r
CD
o
D)
3
CD
;
o
"'C
..;o·
CD
~
en
25

Menus and Settings
Menus are used to set the shooting, printing and playback settings as
well as such camera settings as the date/time and electronic beep.
The following menus are available.
eFUNC. Menu
e Rec., Play, Print, Set up, and My Camera Menus
FUNe. Menu
This menu sets many of the common shooting functions.
CD
001:8
~~
CD Set the camera to the shooting mode.

® Press the FUNC. button.
@ Use the. or T button to select a menu item.
Some items may not be selectable in some shooting modes.
@ Use the .... or ~ button to select an option for the menu item.
You can select further options with the SET button for some options.
After selecting an option, you can press the shutter button to shoot
immediately. After shooting, this menu will appear again, allowing you to
adjust the settings easily.
® Press the FUNC. button.
26
Rec., Play, Print, Set up, and My Camera Menus
Convenient settings for shooting, playback or printing can be set with
these menus.
o (Rec.) Menu
[EJ (Play) Menu
I
~ (Print) Menu
CD
o
MENU
•
®
0
MENU
II
11J
CD
0'
CiJ
® You can switch c:
t.n
between menus S·
with the .... or ~ CC
button when this ....::::T
part is selected. CD
eThis example shows the Rec. menu. o
Q)
eln playback mode, the Play menu, Print menu, Set up menu, and
My Camera menu displays. 3
CD
CD Press the MENU button. Dl
® Use the .... or ~ button to switch between menus. o
You can also use the zoom lever to switch between menus. "'C
CD
@ Use the .. or T button to select menu items.
Some items may not be selectable in some shooting modes. ....Dl
@ Use the .... or ~ button to select an option. cr
~
Menu items followed by an ellipsis (...) can only be set after pressing the t.n
SeT button to display the next menu. Press the SeT button again to confirm
the setting.
® Press the MENU button.
27

Menu List
FUNe. Menu
Menu Item Reference Page
S!l Exposure Compensation p.75
I1l White Balance p.77
iii My Colors p.80
mI Bracket pp. 68, 76
~ Flash Exposure Compensation/Flash Output p.82
til Metering Mode p.73
III Movie Recording Pixels/Frame Rate p.48
II Recording Pixels (Still Image) p.36
!:I Compression (Still Image) p.36
Rec. Menu
Menu Item Options Reference Page
Flash Sync 1st-curtain*1/2nd-curtain p.83
Slow Synchro Auto*1 /Manual p.38
Flash Adjust On*1/0ff p.82
Red-eye On*1/0ff Basic p. 12
Cont. Shooting ~ (Standard Continuous Mode)*1/Em p.42

(High-Speed Continuous Mode)
Self-timer LI1 (10 sec.f1/~ (2 sec.) /~ (Custom) p.43
Spot AE Point Center*1/AF Point pp. 73, 74
Safety Shift On/Off*1 p.60
MF-Point Zoom On*1/0ff p.66
AF Mode Continuous*1 /Single p.67
AF-assist Beam On*1/0ff p.12
Tally Lamp On*1/0ff p.46
28

Menu Item Options Reference Page
On/Of(1
Digital Zoom p.41
([On] is the default setting for Movie mode)
Review Off /2*1 to 10 sec. / Hold Basic p. 7
Save Original On/Off*1 p.56
Reverse Disp. On*1/0ff Basic p. 2
IS Mode Off/Continuous*1/Shoot Only*2/Panning*2 p.39
Converter
Intervalometer
Off*1/WC-DC58A/TC-DC588
Shooting interval: 1*1 to 60 min.
Number of images: 2*1 to 100 shots
p.143
p.84
II
tD
(I)
LCD monitor 1, 2 0'
LCDNiewfinder Viewfinder 1, 2 ;
On*4/0ff c:
Custom Display tn
Settings Shooting info. On*5/0ff*6 p.17 :i"
ce
Grid Lines*3 On*5/0ff*6
....:::T
(I)
Histogram On*5/0ff*6 oQ)
Set Shortcut button - p.61 3(I)
Save Settings - p.86
DJ
*1 Default setting
*2 Cannot be set in .". o
"'C
*3 Allows you to display a grid (9 sections) on the LCD monitor to help in
determining the X- and Y-axis of the subject and composing the shot.
..,
(I)
....
Q)
The grid lines will not be recorded in the image.
*4 Default setting for all display locations
o·
:::J
*5 Default setting for LCD Monitor 2 and Viewfinder 2 tn
*6 Default setting for LCD Monitor 1 and Viewfinder 1
29

Play Menu
IJ Transition p.99
II Slide Show p.105
_ My Colors p.100
n Sound Recorder p.103
II Protect p.109
[I Rotate p.98
II Erase all p.110
II Transfer Order p.114
Print Menu
Print
Select Images & Qty. p.111
Select All Images p.112
Clear All Selections p.113
Print Settings p.113
30

Set up Menu
Menu Item Options Summary/Reference Page
Mutes all sounds except warnings when set to [On]
Mute OnfOf(1
(Basic p. 4).
Volume Adjusts the volume of the start-up, operation, self-
timer, shutter, and playback sounds. The volume
cannot be adjusted if [Mute] is set to [On].
-
Start-up Adjusts the volume of the start-up sound when the
Vol. camera is turned on.
Operation
Vol.
Adjusts the volume of the operation sound that
plays when any button other than the shutter
II
button is pressed during operation.
Selftimer Adjusts the volume of the self-timer sound played
Vol. 2 sec. before the shutter is released.
Adjusts the volume of the sound played when the
Shutter
shutter releases. The shutter sound does not play
Volume
while a movie is recording.
Playback Adjusts the volume of movie sounds, sound
Vol. memos and sound recorder.
Sets microphone level, wind filter cut and sampling
Audio
rate (p. 50).
Adjusts the brightness for the LCD monitor and
LCD . . (Normal)*1f viewfinder separately. (Display the location you
Brightness wish to adjust the brightness for, and then
o
C (Bright) "'C
(I)
configure the settings.) ;
~
Power Saving
~-
p.23 o·
:::S'
Sets whether or not the camera automatically
Auto Power tJ)
On*1fOff powers down after a set period of time elapses
Down
without the camera being operated.
10 sec.!20 sec.! Sets the length of time before the LCD monitor (or
Display Off 30 sec.!1 min.*1f viewfinder) turns off when no camera operation is
2 min.!3 min. performed.
Time Zone Home*1/World p.24
Date/Time Basic p. 4
Format p.35
31

Menu Item Options Summary/Reference Page
File Number Continuous*1/Auto p.90

Reset
Create Folder p.88
rcreaieNe"W Check mark (On)/ Creates a folder for the next shooting session.
Folder No check mark (Off)
Of(1/0 aily/ You can also set a creation time.
Auto Create
Mon.-Sun.lMonthly
Auto Rotate On*1/0ff p.87
Sets the unit of measurement of the distance
Distance Units m/cm*1 or ftlin displayed for the MF indicator and the focus range.
Language Basic p. 5
Video System NTSC/PAL p.116
Auto*1/~
Print Method (PictBridge See below*2
connection)
Reset All p.34
*1 Default setting
*2 Allows you to switch the connection method of the printer. There is no need
to change settings under normal circumstances, but when printing images
taken in iii
(Wide) recording pixels on an entire side of wide size paper with
the SELPHY CP710/CP510 Canon Compact Photo Printer, select ~. This
setting is remembered even after turning the power off, so be sure to switch
back to [Auto] when printing image sizes other than iii
(however, this
method cannot be changed while connected to a printer).
32

My Camera Menu
Reference
Menu Item Options
Page
Selects a common theme for each My Camera
Theme
settings item.
--
Sets the start-up image when you turn on the
Start-up Image
camera.
Sets the start-up sound when you turn on the
Start-up Sound
camera.
Operation Sound
Sets the sound when any button other than the
shutter button is pressed.
p.117
II
Sets the sound informing you that the photo will be
Selftimer Sound
taken in 2 seconds.
Sets the sound played when the shutter button is
Shutter Sound pressed all the way down. The shutter sound does
not play when a movie is recording.
My Camera Menu E!1 (Off)/D*/m/m
Contents
* Default setting
o
"'C
..,
CD
...o·
D)
::::s
tn
33

Resetting Settings to Their Default
Values
1 W (Set up) Menu" [Reset All]. , "' ',II?
See Menus and Settings (p. 27) Auto Rotate Or
Dlstance Um t3 ill/em
Language E:ngllsh
VIdeo System NTSC
Ii¥I • Settings canno.t be reset when the camera is connected to a

LMJ computer or printer.
• The following settings cannot be reset to default:
- [Date/Time], [Language], [Time Zone] and [Video System]
options in the [W (Set up)] menu (pp. 31,32)
- Colors specified in the Color Accent (p. 53) or Color Swap
(p. 54) modes of the SeN mode
- C Mode Settings (p. 86)
- White balance data set with the custom white balance
function (p. 78)
- Newly registered My Camera settings (p. 117)
• When the camera is in shooting mode and the mode dial is
set to C, only the settings saved for C mode will return to
default settings. This is the only way to return C mode
settings to defaults.
34

Formatting Memory Cards
You should always format a new memory card or one from which you
wish to erase all images and other data.
W(Set up) Menu" [Format].

II
[OK] • SET button. st

• To perform a low level format, use the'" or" button to select [Low (D
Level Format] and the .... or ~ button to add a check mark. ~
• If [Low Level Format] is selected, you can 3
(D
cancel formatting partway by pressing ;
the SET button. You can still use the
memory card without problem even if
"'C
o
formatting was halted partway, but the (D
data is erased completely. ; .....
o·
Displays when audio only ~
data is present (p. 102)
(j] You should select the [Low Level Format] option if you suspect
the read/write speed of a memory card has dropped. A low level
format may require 2 to 3 minutes with some memory cards.
35

IShooting
1 FUNC. Menu+- r:II*

(Compression/Recording Pixels)
.11 (Recording Pixels).
• Use the ~ or ~ button to select

recording pixels settings.
• cQ settings cannot be made in IWI mode.
* Default setting.
_--_.
.
2 SET button • ~* (Compression).

• Use the ~ or ~ button to select
compression.
* Default setting. I
Number of shots remaining
36

Approximate Values for Recording Pixels
Recording Pixels
Purpose
Display Pixels
Printing to about A3 size prints
II L (Large) 2816 x 2112 pixels
297 x 420 mm (11.7 x 16.5 in.)
II M1 (Medium 1) 2272 x 1704 pixels Large Printing to about A4 size prints

210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7 in.)
1m M2 (Medium 2) 1600 x 1200 pixels ! Print postcard-size prints

148 x 100 mm (6 x 4 in.)
Print L-size prints
Small 119 x 89 mm (4.7 x 3.5 in.)
II S (Small) 640 x 480 pixels

Send images as e-mail attachments
or shoot more images
Print wide size prints (Images are
II
en
recorded with 16:9 aspect ratios.
::r
o
iii Widescreen 2816 x 1584 pixels
Areas not recorded will not display
as black bars on the LCD monitor.)
...:i"
o
cc
Approximate Values for Compression Settings
Compression Purpose
rn Superfine High
Quality
Shoot higher quality images
~ Fine Shoot normal quality images
!:J Normal ~
Normal Shoot more images
~ • See Image Data Sizes (Estimated) (p. 152)

UJ • See Memory Cards and Estimated Capacities (p. 151)
37

The flash timing is adjusted to slow shutter speeds. This reduces the
chance that only the background will appear dark when a person is
shot against a twilight background or night scene, or when an interior
shot is taken.
1 L!J (Ree.) Menu ..

[Slow Synehro] .. [On]/[Off]*.
* Default setting.
Ii¥l • The fastest shutter speed for flash synchronization is 1/500

LjJ second. The camera automatically resets the shutter speed to
1/500 second if a faster speed is selected .
• When [Slow Synchro] set to [On], camera shake may become
a factor even if [IS Mode] is set to [Continuous]. Use of a
tripod is recommended.
38

The image stabilizer function allows you to minimize the camera
shake effect (blurred images) when you shoot distant subjects that
have been magnified or when you shoot in dark conditions.
Types of Image Stabilization

Continuous You can check the effect of the IS mode on image blur on the LCD
monitor (or viewfinder) since the IS mode runs continually. This makes it
easier to compose images and focus on subjects.
Shoot Only IS mode is only activated when the shutter button is pressed, so subjects
will be captured with reduced blur even if their movements the LCD
monitor (or viewfinder) are not smooth. This option is not available in the
II
en
:::r
-" mode. o
Panning This option only stabilizes the effect of up and down camera motions on ....
o
the image. This option is recommended for shooting objects moving :i"
cc
horizontally. This option is not available in the -" mode.
1 L!J (Ree.) Menu +- [IS Mode] .-

[Continuous]*/[Shoot Only]/
[Panning]/[Off].
* Default setting.
The following icons appear on the LCD monitor (or viewfinder) if it is

set to Information View display.
[Continuous] [Shoot Only] [Panning] Reference Page

(t~ ((@» ((+l) With no lens converter -
With separately sold
«I~ «(!'~ ((~ p.143
tele-converter mounted
With separately sold
((II «~) ((~) p.143
wide converter mounted
39

This mode allows even closer shooting of the subject than standard
Macro mode, magnifying the subject further. In addition, the background
can be shot differently from the standard macro shooting effects.
Shooting is possible when the distance from the front of the lens to
the subject is in the following range:
a to 10 cm (0 to 3.9 in.) (maximum wide angle, zoom not available)
1 Hold down the ~ button to

display ~ on the LCD monitor (or
viewfinder).
• Pressing the ~ button again cancels
the Super Macro mode (Macro mode
is also canceled).
• The image area when the camera is as Zoomed 0 em away from
the flower
close as possible to the subject is 22 x
16 mm (0.87 x 0.63 in.) (maximum
wide angle).
40

fmID. t& ~~SCN*·~ P Tv Av M I
-'-"-_N'-'N_-'N_'-"'N-:·c~·~~~tN·b~-;~tN·i·~N'.N'N~~d-'."N~~d;;~
You can combine digital zoom with optical zoom to magnify and shoot.
• Still Images: approx. 48x max.
• Movies: approx. 48x max.
L!1 (Rec.) Menu'" [Digital Zoom] .,. [On]/[Off]*.

See Menus and Settings (p. 27) II
en
• [On] is the default setting for movie :::T
shooting.
..
o
o
S·
CC
* Default setting.
2 Turn the zoom lever toward [tJ and shoot the image.
• When you press the [tJ button, the zoom stops when the lens
reaches the maximum optical telephoto setting (when shooting
still images). Press the [tJ button again to activate the digital
zoom and digitally zoom the image further.
• Press the I!Hl
button to zoom out.
Optical zoom (White)
Digital zoom (Blue)
Iil,mages become coarser the more they are digitally zoomed.
41

" t& ~ ~ SCN* P Tv Av M !
"''''''":''c~'~~'~t'"b'~'~~'t'i~'''M''~'~d'~~''"'~'~d~'~~'
In this mode, the camera shoots continuously while the shutter button
is held down.
In addition, continuous shooting is possible (p. 151) at a consistent
interval (smooth continuous shooting) with a recommended memory
card*1 until the memory card is full. *2
• Even if continuous shooting suddenly stops, the memory card may not be
full.
Standard Continuous Mode Recommended when you want to confirm the

QI Approx.1.5 shots/second*2 *3 subject during continuous shooting.
High-Speed Continuous Recommended when you want the briefest shutter
~ Shooting interval during continuous shooting.
Approx. 2.3 shots/second*2 *3
*1 A super high-speed SDC-512MSH memory card (sold separately) that has
been low level formatted (p. 35) before shooting is recommended.
*2 This reflects standard shooting criteria established by Canon. Actual results
may vary according to the subject and shooting conditions.
*3 When using Large/Fine mode.
1 Press the ~ to display ~.

e ~ is the default setting for, (however, ~ (High-Speed
Continuous Shooting) cannot be set).
Shooting.
e The camera will continue to record successive images while the
shutter button is held down.
Recording will cease when the shutter button is released.
To Cancel Continuous Shooting: Press the ~ button to display iii.

rE¥le The interval between shots may lengthen if the internal
LJJ memory becomes full.
elf the flash fires, the interval between shots may lengthen.
42

Selecting a Continuous Shooting Method
Select either standard or high-speed continuous shooting.
1 L!J (Ree.) Menu ..

[Cont. Shooting] .. ~/EIlJ.
• Select a mode that su pports

continuous shooting.
2 Press the MENU button.

Ii¥l Continuous shooting is canceled when you turn the camera
II
en
CMJ off, although the continuous shooting selection is retained. :::r'
o
'-- ------1 o
,...
:i"
cc
~,h~"~U ~ ~.~,~,,~W~~H'~W!~ . U~~, . ~.]

•• ••
You can set the shutter to a 10 sec. (_) or 2 sec. delay (11]), or to a
custom delay time and number of shots (~ : Custom Timer), for
shooting after the shutter button is pressed.
1 Press the ~ to display lim, II] or ~ .

2 Shoot.
• When the shutter button is pressed fully, the self-timer lamp will
blink (when using Red-Eye Reduction, it will light before 2 sec.).
To Cancel the Self-Timer: Press the ~ button to display iii.
[j] You can change the self-timer sound (pp. 33, 117).
43

Changing the Self-Timer Countdown Time
(11/111)
1 L!J (Rec.) Menu. [Self-timer] .. • *1,11].
• The following occurs.

- 11:
2 sec. before the shutter releases, the self-timer sound
and lamp will speed up*2.
- 111:
The self-timer sound will play when the shutter button is
pressed and the shutter will release 2 sec. later.
*1 Default setting.
*2 May differ depending on My Camera settings.
44
Changing the Delay Time and Number of
Shots (Lt1)
You can change the delay time (0-10,15,20,30 sec.) and number
of shots (1-10). However, the settings cannot be made for the H
(Color Accent), It
(Color Swap), r::Q (Stitch Assist) or -" (Movie)
in the SeN mode.
1 L!J (Ree.) Menu • [Self-timer]

.Lt1.
en
::s-
2 Select [Delay]*' or [Shots]* .- O
o
......
SET button. :i.
• The self-timer sound will behave as to
follows.
- If 2 or more seconds have been
specified, the self-timer sound will
speed up 2 seconds before
shooting. .
- If multiple shots have been specified for the [Shots] option,
the sound will play for the first shot only.
* Default settings are 10 sec., 3 shots
[5¥1lf the [Shots] option is set to 2 or more shots, the following

LjI occurs.
- The exposure and white balance are fixed at the settings
selected for the first shot.
- If the flash fires, the interval between shots may lengthen.
- The interval between shots may lengthen if the internal
memory becomes full.
- Shooting will automatically cease if the memory card
becomes full.
45

IUsing the Mode Dial
-" Movie Shooting
,,~,','~"~~ s~~,,~,~~P TV,,,~~,~j
No matter what position the mode dial is in, you can shoot movies *1
with just a push of the Movie button.
You can select the movie recording pixels and frame rate (p. 48) and
shoot with color effects such as Color Accent, Color Swap, and My
Colors.
• Max. Clip Size: 1 GS*2
*1 You can record until the memory card is full (when a super high-speed
memory card is used, such as the recommended SDC-512MSH).
*2 Even if the clip size has not reached 1 GB, recording will stop at the moment
the clip length reaches 1 hour.
Depending on the storage capacity of the memory card and the speed at
which the data is written, recording will stop before reaching 1 GB or 1 hour.
1 Press the Movie button to shoot.

• Shooting starts when the Movie button
is pressed.
• Recording will include sound.
• During shooting, the recording time (in
seconds) and ". Rec." appear on the
LCD monitor (or viewfinder).
• The tally lamp blinks red during movie recording and turns off
when the recording session is over. When [Tally Lamp] is set to
[Off] in the Rec. menu, the lamp does not blink (p. 28).
• Pressing the Movie button again stops recording.
Recording will stop automatically under the following
circumstances.
- When the maximum recording time elapses
- When the internal memory and the memory card becomes full
• When shooting with the Color Accent or the Color Swap, be
sure to specify them in SeN mode beforehand (p. 53).
• Even if you shoot movies with the recording pixels for still
images set to iii,
the aspect ratio of the recorded movie will be
the usual 4:3 screen.
46

•....•.••.....•..•. PfC)perly-on-c;ther camE~ras.···· . • . ·.../..i·1I
· • · •.
c:
JE¥l • When you press the MF button, AF lock is set at the current fA
L)J focus condition. !MfI displays on the LCD (or viewfinder). S'
(Q
Press the MF button again to release the setting. .....
::r
When AF lock has been registered to the shortcut button, AF CD
can be readjusted and locked while shooting movies by
pressing the ;§] button (m
appears on the screen).
3:
oQ.
• You can set the AE lock (p. 70) and exposure shift while CD
shooting movies (you can also set them before shooting when C
the mode dial is set to -,,). [
1. Press the ISO button
The exposure will lock (AE lock) and the exposure shift bar
will appear in the LCD monitor (or viewfinder).
2. Use the ~ or ~ button to adjust the exposure.
Press the ISO button again to release the setting. Also, the
setting will be canceled if you press the MENU button or
change the white balance, My Colors, or shooting mode
settings.
When AE lock has been registered to the shortcut button,
AE can be readjusted and locked while shooting movies by
pressing the ;§] button (mIl
appears on the screen). You
cannot perform this operation, however, when the
exposure shift bar is displayed on the screen.
47

[ifl • When movie recording is stopped in any mode dial except
UJ ." ,the still image settings return to the settings before
movie shooting began. AE lock (p. 70) and exposure shift,
however, are disabled .
• QuickTime 3.0 or later is required to play back movies (Data
type: AVI/Compression method: Motion JPEG) on a
computer. QuickTime (for Windows) is included on the Canon
Digital Camera Solution Disk. On the Macintosh platform, this
program is standard with Mac as x or later.
Changing Movie Recording Pixels and

Frame Rates
You can change the movie recording pixels and frame rate in any
shooting mode.
1 FUNC. button • rIJ*/~/fI)/flJl

flI(Recording Pixels/Frame
Rate).
• Use the ..... or ~ button to select

the recording pixels/frame rate
and press the FUNC. button. Remaining Time (Sec.)
* Default setting.
Movie Recording Pixels/Frame Rates

Frame rates indicate the number of frames recorded or played
back each second. The higher the frame rate, the smoother the
appearance of motion.
Recording Pixels Frame Rate
9 1
640 x 480 pixels 30 frames/sec.
I:!Dl I

flI: 320 x 240 pixels 15 frames/sec.
[ifl • See Image Data Sizes (Estimated) (p. 153)

LjJ • See Memory Cards and Estimated Capacities (p. 152)
48

Shooting Still Images while Shooting a
Movie
seN c:Q -" P Tv Av M
You can shoot a high quality still image* while shooting a movie.
* The recording pixels and compression are the same as those set for still
images (excluding iii).
1 While shooting a movie, press the shutter button
halfway to focus.
Press the shutter halfway so the camera can focus and set
exposure for the still image. During this process, movie
shooting continues.
2 Press the shutter button all the way to shoot the

image.
• The movie goes black for an instant while the still image is shot,
II
C
tn
and then returns to normal. However, sound recording continues :i.
ec
uninterrupted.
• The shutter sound is also recorded (and cannot be disabled).
....::r
(I)
3:
o
c.
(I)
c
!:
49

Microphone level (sound recording level), wind filter and sampling
rate can be changed.
1 iii (Set up) menu" [Audio].

2 [Mic Level] .. set the sound

recording level with the .... or ..
button.
3 [Wind Filter] .. [On]*/[Off] .

• This suppresses noise when the
wind is strong .
• When set to On, ~\ displays in the
LCD monitor (or viewfinder).
* Default setting.
50

4 [Sampling Rate] .. [44.100
kHz]*/[11.025 kHz]/[22.050 kHz] .
• The sound quality increases in the
order of the following settings, but
the required memory also
increases.
11.025 kHz, 22.050 kHz, and 44.100
kHz
* Default setting.
Ji¥l • Even if the recording volume becomes too loud, it

LjJ automatically adjusts to avoid distortion of loud sounds.
• Wind filter suppresses noise that occurs in locations with
strong wind. However, unnatural sound can result when
used to record in locations with no wind. II
Stitch Assist can be used to shoot overlapping images that can later
be merged (stitched) to create one panoramic image on a computer.
The overlapping seams of

several adjacent images
can be joined into a single
panoramic image.
51

1 Use the <lllII or ~ button to select
the shooting sequence.
• You can select from the following
5 shooting directions.
- Left to right horizontally
- Right to left horizontally
- Vertically, bottom to top
- Vertically, top to bottom
- Clockwise starting at the top left
2 Shoot the first frame the sequence.

• The exposure and white balance are set and locked with the
first image.
J Compose the ~econdi-;~;;;~

that it overlaps a portion of the
first and shoot.
• Use the .A., T, .... or ~ button to return
the previous image or retake the
recorded images.
• Minor discrepancies in the overlapping
portions can be corrected when the
images are stitched together.
.....,.....---........................._ - - -
4 Repeat the procedure for additional images.
• A sequence may contain up to 26 images.
• Press the SET button after the last shot.
JS¥l Use PhotoStitch, a supplied program, to merge the images on a

L..iJ computer.
52

You can easily change the colors in an image when it is shot for both
stills and movies, allowing you to enjoy producing various effects.
Depending on the shooting conditions, however, the images may
appear rough, or you may not get the expected color. Before
photographing important subjects, we recommend taking trial shots
and checking the results. By setting the [Save Original] function
(p. 56) to [On] when shooting stills, you can also record both the
altered image and the original, unaltered image.
Shoot with all colors, with the exception of the color
It Color Accent
specified in the LCD monitor, in black and white.
IJ Color Swap
Specify a color in the LCD monitor, and shoot with
another color replacing the one specified. The specified
color can only be swapped with one other color.
II
C
tn
:i"
15¥1 Depending on scene being shot, the ISO speed may increase, cc
III increasing the amount of noise in the image. :::r
..
eD
3:
Shooting with Color Accent Mode o
0-
eD
1 Use the or ~ button to select
<llIIII C
H (Color Accent) .. SET button. ~
• The camera will switch to color input
mode, and the display will alternate
between the original image and the
Color Accent image (using the
previously set color).
2 Aim the camera so that the C~I~~-~OU wish to retain

appears at the center of the LCD monitor (or
viewfinder) and press the <llIIII button.
• Only one color can be specified.
• You can use the • or T button to specify the range of the
colors that are retained.
-5: Only takes the color that you want to retain.
+5: Also takes colors close to the one that you want to retain.
53

3 Complete the setting with the SET button, and shoot.
• This completes the setting.
• When you press the Movie button, you can shoot movies in
Color Accent mode.
ri¥l • The default Color Accent is green.

UJ • You may not obtain the expected results after color input
mode if you use the flash .
• The specified Color Accent is retained even if the camera's
power is turned off.
Shooting with Color Swap Mode
•
• •
Original Color Desired Color
(Before Swapping) (After Swapping)
1 Use the ~ or ~ button to select

Pm (Color Swap) .. SET button.
• The camera will switch to color input
mode, and the display will alternate
between the original image and the
color swap image (using the previously
set color).
54

Aim the camera so that the color you wish to change
appears at the center of the LCD monitor (or
viewfinder) and press the ..... button.
• You can use the A or ... button to specify the range of the colors
that are retained.
-5: Only takes the color that you want to change.
+5: Also takes colors close to the one that you want to change.
3 Aim the camera-so that the desired color ap~;ars~

the center of the LCD monitor (or viewfinder) and
press the ~ button.
4 Complete the setting with th~ SET button, and shoot.

II
c:
fA
• When you press the Movie button, you can shoot movies in S·
Color Swap mode. (Q
....::r
(I)
Ii¥l • The default setting for Color Swap changes green into white. 3:
L..jJ • You may not obtain the expected results after color input o
mode if you use the flash. c.
(I)
• The colors specified in the Color Swap mode are retained c
even if the camera's power is turned off. eI
55

Saving Original Images
Not only can you save images with altered colors when shooting still
images with the Color Accent or Color Swap modes, but you can
also choose to save the original images (before the color change).
1 L!J (Rec.) menu • [Save

Original] .. [On]/[Off]*.
• If [On] is selected, the images will be

saved as consecutive file numbers.
The original image will be the lower
file number, while the image shot in
Color Accent or Color Swap mode will be the higher file number.
* Default setting.
ri¥llf [Save Original] is set to [On]

CMJ • Only the image set with Color Accent or Color Swap is
displayed on the LCD monitor (or viewfinder) during
shooting .
• The image displayed on the LCD monitor (or viewfinder)
immediately after shooting is the one shot with Color
Accent or Color Swap (pp. 53, 54). As erasing the image at
this time will cause the original image to be erased at the
same time, be careful.
• As two images are saved with each shot, the number of
recordable shots displayed on the LCD monitor (or
viewfinder) will be half the number that is displayed when
[Save Original] is set to [Off].
56

You can freely select camera settings such as the shutter speed and
aperture value to suit your shooting purposes. After settings are
made, shooting procedures are the same as for tmID Auto Mode
(Basic Guide p. 6).
(5¥l • For information on the relation between the aperture value

U.I and shutter speed see p. 58.
• Please note that camera shake becomes a factor at low
a
shutter speeds and with larger aperture values. If (camera
shake warning) appears in the LCD monitor (or viewfinder),
try the following steps to resolve the problem.
- Use the (!11» (image stabilizer) function.
- Raise the ISO speed.
- Raise the flash to enable firing.
II
c:
- Use a tripod. en
S'
P Program AE
...::r-
cc
CD
3:
o
Q.
Use the program AE mode to have the camera automatically set the CD
shutter speed and aperture value to match the brightness of the c
scene. !:
• When a correct exposure cannot be obtained, the shutter speed
and aperture values are shown in red on the LCD monitor when the
button is pressed halfway. Use the following shooting methods
obtain the correct exposure and make them show in white.
- Use the flash (raise the flash).
- Adjust the ISO Speed.
- Change the metering mode.
(5¥l You can change the combinations of shutter speeds and

U.I aperture values without altering the exposure (p. 70).
57

Tv Setting the Shutter Speed
When you set the shutter speed in the shutter speed-priority AE

mode, the camera automatically selects an aperture value to match
the brightness. Faster shutter speeds allow you to catch an
instantaneous image of a moving subject, while slower speeds create
a flowing effect and allow you to shoot without a flash in dark areas.
1 Use the ~ or ~ button to select the shutter speed,

then shoot.
15¥1- The aperture value and shutter speed change according to

LiJ the zoom state as follows.
Aperture value Shutter Speed (seconds)
F 2.7 - 3.5 to 1/1600
Maximum F4.0 - 5.0 to 1/2000
Wide Angle *1 F 5.6 - 7.1 to 1/2500
F 8.0 to 1/3200
F 3.5-4.5 to 1/1600
Maximum
F 5.0 - 6.3 to 1/2000
Telephoto *2
F 7.1- 8.0 to 1/2500
*1 Maximum wide angle setting
*2 Maximum telephoto setting
- The fastest shutter speed for flash synchronization is 1/500
second. The camera automatically resets the shutter speed to
1/500 second if a faster speed is selected.
58

Shutter Speed Display
• The numbers in the table below indicate the shutter speed in seconds.
1/160 indicates 1/160 second. Also, quote marks indicate the decimal
place, so that 0"3 indicates 0.3 second and 2" indicates 2 seconds.
15" 13" 10" 8" 6" 5" 4" 3"2 2"5 2" 1"6 1"3 1" 0"8 0"6
0"5 0"4 0"3 1/4 1/5 1/6 1/8 1/10 1/13 1/15 1/20 1/25
1/30 1/40 1/50 1/60 1/80 1/100 1/125 1/160 1/200 1/250
1/320 1/400 1/500 1/640 1/800 1/1000 1/1250 1/1600
1/2000 1/2500 1/3200
• You can change the combinations of shutter speeds and aperture

values without altering the exposure (p. 70).
Av Setting the Aperture Avl

,",.w. ".;
ll
C
The aperture adjusts the amount of light entering through the lens. 5·
When you set the aperture in the aperture-priority AE mode, the to
camera automatically selects a shutter speed to match the brightness. ~
Selecting a lower aperture value (opening the aperture) allows you to CD
blur the background and create a beautiful portrait. ~
A higher aperture value (closing it) brings the entire range from Q.
foreground to background into focus. The larger the aperture value, CD
the greater the range of the image brought into clear focus. ~
1 Use the <llIIII or ~ button to select the aperture value,
then shoot.
Ii] flash is 1/500 second. The aperture value setting may therefore
be changed automatically to match the synchronized flash
speed even if its value was set previously.
59

Aperture Setting Display
• The larger the aperture value the smaller the lens opening, allowing
less light to enter the camera.
I F2.7 F3.2 F3.5 F4.0 F4.5 F5.0 F5.6 F6.3 F7.1 F8.0
• You can change the combinations of shutter speeds and aperture

values without altering the exposure (p. 70).
Safety Shift
With Tv and Av modes, if [Safety Shift] is turned [On] in the
Rec. menu, the shutter speed or aperture value is automatically
adjusted for the correct exposure when it cannot be otherwise
obtained .
• Safety Shift is disabled when the flash is enabled.
M Manually Setting the Shutter Speed and Aperture

M
You can manually set the shutter speed and aperture to shoot
images.
1 Use the ..... or ~ button to select the shutter speed, and

use the'" or ... button to select the aperture value,
then shoot.
• When you press the shutter button halfway, the difference between
the standard exposure * and the selected exposure appears on the
LCD monitor (or viewfinder). If the difference is more than 2 stops,
"-2" or "+2" appears on the LCD monitor (or viewfinder) in red.
* The standard exposure is calculated by measuring the brightness according
to the selected metering method.
r5¥1. If the zoom is adjusted after these values are set, the aperture
LjJ value or the shutter speed may change in accordance with
the zoom position .
• The brightness of the LCD monitor (or viewfinder) matches
the selected shutter speed.and aperture value. When you
select a fast shutter speed or shoot a subject in a dark place,
raise the flash, and then set it to ~ @ (Flash On with red-eye
reduction) or ~ (Flash On), the image will always be bright.
60

IAdvanced Shooting Functions
~~H'_~W'~W'~"~'~~"'~~~H~"!~"~~H~j
One frequently used function can be registered to the ~ (Shortcut)
button.
You can register the following functions. However, not all functions
can be registered depending on the shooting mode.
• Recording Pixels (Still image)*1 • Movie Recording Pixels/
(p.36) Frame Rate (Movie) (p. 48)
• Metering System (p. 73) • White Balance*2 (p. 77)
• My Colors*3 (p. 80) • Image Stabilizer Function
(p.39)
• AE Lock (p. 70)
• Display Off (p. 23)
• AF Lock (p. 65)
• Create New Folder (p. 88)
I»
c.
*1 Default setting. <
D)
*2 A custom white balance can be used once a custom white balance reading ~
(")
has been taken. CD
*3 A custom photo effect can be used once a custom effect has been set. c.
en
..
::::T
o
o
:i'
CC
'TI
C
..O·
~
(")
~
en
61

Registering a Function
1 L!J (Rec.) Menu +- [Set Shortcut eYJ
button]. IS Moce CcntwlJOUS
See Menus and Settings (p. 27) Converter Off
Inte r valo11leter
Use the A, T, ..... or ~ button to

select the function you wish to
register+- SET button.
• If an "x" mark appears on the lower
right of the icon, you can still register
this function but the current shooting
mode will be retained and pressing the
shortcut button will not activate the
function.
Mode dial set to tmID
;tr:§] Using the Shortcut Button
1 Press the;tr:§] button.

• The registered function is activated and its icon appears on the
LCD monitor or viewfinder (except in the Display Off setting).
• Each press of the;§] button cycles
between setting values of the
registered function.
• Functions that are not available in the
current shooting mode will not appear
even if they are registered.
62

The AF frame indicates the area of the composition on which the
camera focuses and can be set manually to the desired area. This is
convenient for focusing accurately on your chosen subject to obtain
the composition you desire.
1 Press the EEl button.

• The AF frame appears in green.
Use the .., T, .... or ~ button to move the AF frame to

the desired area, then press the EEl button.
• You can immediately shoot the image using the selected AF
frame by pressing the shutter button instead of pressing the EEl
button.
• The AF frame will move back to its original position (Center) if
you hold down the EEl button. II»
Q.
<
Ii¥l. The focus is locked to the center AF frame when the digital Q)
:::I
LjJ zoom is used. (")
CD
• The AF frame appears as follows when the shutter button is Q.
pressed halfway. en
:::I"'
- Green: Shooting preparations complete o
- Yellow: Focusing difficulty
• When the Spot AE Point is selected as the light metering
...:i"
o
mode, you can use the selected Spot AE Point as the AF

cc
."
frame (p. 73). C
• The position of the AF frame returns to the center once the
power is turned off.
...o·
:::I
(")
:::I
en
63

• • ~~~SCN*cQ·"PTvAvM!
;Th~-E"';h~~ti'~gU~~d~'~~~'~~t"b~"u~;;d'~
It may be difficult to focus on the following types of subjects.
• Subjects with extremely low contrast to the surroundings
• Scenes with a mixture of near and far subjects
• Subjects with extremely bright objects at the center of the
composition
• Subjects that are moving quickly
• Subjects through glass: Try to shoot as close to the glass as
possible to reduce the chances of light reflecting back off the glass.
Shooting with the Focus Lock

1 Aim the camera so that an object at the same focal
distance as the main subject is centered in the
viewfinder or in the AF frame displayed on the LCD
monitor (or viewfinder).
Press the shutter button halfway.
3 Re-ai~-the camera to compo;~-the shot as desired

and press the shutter button fully.
64

Shooting with the AF Lock
* tmID and ~ mode cannot be set.
1 Aim the camera so that an object at the same focal

distance as the main subject is centered in the AF
frame.
2 Press the shutter button halfway and press the MF

button.
• [MfI and the MF indicator will appear on the LCD monitor (or
viewfinder).
3 Re-aim the camera to compose the shot as desired

and shoot.
To Release the AF Lock: Press the MF button.
Ii¥l. The AF lock is convenient because you can let go of the

LiI shutter button to compose the image. Moreover, the AF lock
is still effective after the picture is taken, allowing you to
II
»
Q.
capture a second image with the same focus. <
• Because c:Q (Stitch Assist) does not display the AF frame, m
:::::s
(")
aim the camera to focus on the subject.
• When you register m
to the shortcut button (p. 61), the focus
is adjusted and locked with a press of the shortcut button, and
CD
Q.
en
::r
you can immediately begin shooting by pressing the shutter o
or Movie button (mIl
appears on the LCD (or viewfinder) ....
o
when using AF loCk). :i"
cc
'TI
s:::
:::::s
....o·
(")
:::::s
t/)
65

Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
The focus can be manually set.
* mm> and , mode cannot be set.
1 Use the'" or .. button to adjust

the focus while holding down the
MF button.
• [MfI and the MF indicator are
displayed.
• When the L!1 (Rec.) menu's [MF-Point
Zoom] is set to [On] (p. 28), the portion
of the image in the AF frame will MF Indicator
appear magnified*.
* However, when using cQ (Stitch Assist), -" (Movie), digital
zoom or while displaying the image on a TV, the display
magnification is not available.
* Can also be set so that the image displayed is not magnified
(p.28).
• The MF indicator shows approximate figures. Use them as a
shooting guideline only.
• After setting the focus, pressing the SeT button causes the
camera to automatically refocus more precisely at a point near
the current focusing point.
To Cancel the Manual Focus: Press the MF button.
Iil You can change distance units displayed on the MF indicator

(p.32).
66

U>.t&~sCN*cQPTv AvM I
··---"-"·_"·-··-:I·~-m-·~~d;H~~·I;-iSi~g-I~]"·i·~-~~~il~-bl~'~'
You can switch between focus settings to shoot.
Continuous The camera is continually focusing on whatever it is aimed even when
the shutter button is not pressed, allowing you to shoot without missing
opportunities. This is the default setting.
Single The camera only focuses when the shutter button is pressed halfway,
conserving battery power.
1 10(Rec.) Menu ... [AF Mode] ...

[Continuous]*/[Single]. CoPt Shootwg Q
See Menus and Settings (p. 27) 8e1f-tl"ne~ tin
Spot liE POlfr: Center
* Default setting.
II
:t-
c.
<
Q)
::s
n
CD
c.
en
::s-
...:i"
O
o
CC
"n::sc
...ci"
::s
en
67

The camera automatically takes three shots: one at the manual focus
position, and one each with focus positions preset nearer and farther.
The nearer and farther focus positions can be set in three steps:
large, medium and small.
[5¥l The three shots are taken at the same interval as high-speed
LjJ continuous shooting, and the images are shot with the focus
position changing in the following order; current position, farther
and nearer.
Continuous Shooting (p. 42)
1 FUNC. Menu .m;*(BKT-OFF)

.. ~ (Focus-BKT) • SET
button.
* Default setting.
Set the amount of focus position Foous..BKT

'- -'- -.'.-.~--'-. . . - -'- '
f4(11 !!)
offset with the ~ or ~ button. ~r
• Press the ~ button to broaden or the
..... button to narrow the focusing distance from the center.
3-p~~ss th; FUNC-:b~tto-n-;nd~hoo~ the -i;ag~-~ith-;h-;-

manual focus (p. 66).
oe ~I
.. .
.
:
.. "h
68

Raise the ISO speed when you wish to reduce the effects of shaking
hands and shoot with the flash off in a dark area or when you wish to
reduce the effects of a moving subject and raise the shutter speed.
1 Press the ISO button to switch settings.

• Cycle through the ~ (High ISO Auto)--+ ~ --+ ~ --+ ~ --+ ~--+
~ --+ ~ (does not display) with each press of the button.
• When Auto is selected, the optimal speed is selected based on
the brightness of the environment at the time of shooting. The
speed is automatically increased in dark places, increasing the
shutter speed and reducing shaking effects.
• When ~ is selected, a speed higher than when using Auto is
selected. The shutter speed increases even more, and
blurriness from hand or subject movement in a scene is less
than when taken in Auto. There may be an increase in noise,
however, when compared to Auto.
II
»
c.
ISO Speed Settings <
w
~
fl!IID P Tv Av M n
(I)
Auto 0* 0* 0* 0* - c.
en
High ISO Auto 0 0 - - - :::T
o
IS080 - 0 0 0 0* o
....
;5.
IS0100 - 0 0 0 0 (,Q
IS0200 -
-n
0 0 0 0 s:::
~
IS0400 - 0 0 0 0 ....
n
IS0800 - 0 0 0 0
o·
~
tn
0: Available *: Default setting
69

You can set the exposure and focus separately. This is effective when
the contrast is too strong between the subject and background or
when a subject is backlit.
Focus on the part of the sUbject on which you wish to

lock the exposure setting.
2 Press the shutter button halfway and press the ISO

button.
-The * will display.

To Release the AE Lock: Press anything except the .. , .., ~ or ~

button.
f5¥1- AE lock can also be set and released in -" mode (p. 46).
LiI- You can use the FE lock when using the flash.
70

Changing shutter speed and aperture value
combinations
Automatically selected combinations of shutter speeds and
aperture values can be freely changed without altering the
exposure (Program Shift).
1 Turn the mode dial to P, Tv, or Av.

2 Focus on the subject on which you wish to lock the
exposure.
3 Press the ISO button while pressing the shutter
button halfway.
• The exposure setting locks and
* appears on the LCD
4 Press the ~ or ~ button until the desired shutter

speed or aperture value is reached.
5 Recompose the image and shoot.
II
»
Q.
• The setting will cancel after the shot is taken. <
Q)
::s
n
CD
Q.
en
:T
o
....o
5·
ea
""T1
c
::s
....o·
n
::s
fn
71

You can obtain the correct exposure regardless of the location of your
subject in the composition.
1 Raise the flash.

2 Press the ~ button and set it to ~ (flash on).
3 Focus on the part of the subject on which you wish to
lock the flash exposure setting.
4 Press the shutter button halfway and press the ISO

button.
• The flash will pre-fire and * will display.

To Release the FE Lock: Press anything except the"', T, ~ or ~
button.
72

Metering Methods
The camera divides images into several zones for light
metering. The camera evaluates complex lighting
conditions, such as the position of the subject, the
[i] Evaluative
brightness, the background, the direct light, and the
backlighting, and adjusts the settings to the correct
exposure for the main subject.
Center-Weighted Averages the light metered from the entire frame, but
[i] Average gives greater weight to the subject matter at the center.
Spot AE Point Meters the area within the spot AE point frame.
Locks the spot metering frame to the center of the LCD
[i] Center
AF Point
--::--------------------------
Moves the spot AE point to the AF frame.
II
1 FUNC. Menu+- [i]* (Evaluative)/[i] (Center-Weighted ~
Average)/[i] (Spot AE Point). ~
See Menus and Settings (p. 26) ~
CD
* Default setting. Q.
en
• Use the ~ or ~ button to adjust the exposure compensation :::s-
and press the FUNC. button. O
o
.....
5·
ea
."
c
::s
.....
(')
cr::s
fA
73

Moving the Spot AE Point to the AF Framel
Centering the Spot AE Point
1 L!J (Ree.) Menu .. [Spot AE
Point] .. [Center]* or
[AF Point].
• When [Spot AE Point] is set to

[Center], the spot AE point frame
[ ] appears at the center of the
LCD monitor (or viewfinder). The AF
frame can be repositioned (p. 63).
• With [AF Point], one AE point
appears within the AF frame. This
frame can be moved as one piece.
[ ] Spot AE Point
* Default setting.
D AF Frame
74

Dt&~~SCN*~PTv Av I
:·C~~~;tb;-;~t-i-~-·.·-·~~d-·~·_·~;d~·;~
Adjust the exposure compensation setting to avoid making a subject
too dark when it is backlit or shot against a bright background, or to
avoid making lights appear too bright in night shots.
1 FUNC. Menu+- mJ* (Exposure

Compensation).
• Use the ~ or ~ button to adjust the

exposure compensation and press the
FUNC. button.
* Default setting.
To Cancel the Exposure Compensation: Restore the compensation
value to [0].
liJ In '~ mode, the exposure shift can be seVcanceled (p. 46).
75

The camera automatically takes three shots: one with standard
exposure and one each with positive and negative compensation.
Ii¥l- The three shots are taken at the same interval as high-speed
l...jJ continuous shooting in the following order: standard
exposure, underexposure and overexposure.
Continuous Shooting (p. 42)
- AEB settings can be combined with exposure compensation
settings (p. 75) to extend the adjustment range.
1 FUNC. Menu ~~* (BKT-OFF)

~fJ (AEB).
* Default setting.
Press the SET button and adjust

the compensation range with the
<llIlII or ~ button.
- The compensation range can be
adjusted in 1/3 increments from -2 to +2
with the exposure at the time of shooting
at the center.
To Cancel the AEB Mode: Select the ~ (BKT-OFF).
76

Normally, the fill
(Auto) white balance setting selects an optimal
white balance. When the fill
(Auto) setting cannot produce natural
looking colors, change the white balance using a setting appropriate
to the light source.
White Balance Settings
[;I] Auto Settings are automatically set by the camera
a Day Light For recording outdoors on a bright day
Cloudy For recording under overcast, shady or twilight skies

C
For recording under tungsten and bulb-type 3- wavelength
Tungsten
D fluorescent lighting
For recording under warm-white, cool-white or warmwhite (3-
~ Fluorescent wavelength) fluorescent lighting
For recording under daylight fluorescent, or daylight fluorescent-
»
c.
Em Fluorescent H
type 3-wavelength lighting
<
D)
~
When using the flash (cannot be set in ~ (Sports) or -" (Movie) n
0 Flash
mode)
(I)
c.
For recording with the optimal white balance data memorized in the en
g Custom
camera from a white-colored object, such as white paper or cloth
::r
o
o.....
S·
1 FUNC. Menu .r;JJ* (Auto). (Q
."
See Menus and Settings (p. 26) s:::
~
• Use the ~ or ~ button to select a white n
.....
balance setting and press the FUNC. c)"
button. ~
en
* Default setting.
77

Using the Custom White Balance
You can set a custom white balance to obtain the optimal setting for
the shooting conditions by having the camera evaluate an object,
such as a piece of white paper or cloth that you wish to establish as
the standard white color.
In particular, take a custom white balance reading for the following
situations that are difficult for the • (Auto) setting to detect correctly.
• Shooting close-ups
• Shooting subjects of monotone color (such as sky, sea or forest)
• Shooting with a peculiar source of light (such as a mercury-vapor lamp)
1 FUNC. Menu .[;1]* (Auto) .11;I

(Custom).
* Default setting. ~
2 Aim the camera at a piece of white paper or cloth and

press the SET button .
• Aim the camera so that the white reference paper or cloth
completely fills the center of the frame.
78

J5fl • You are recommended to set the shooting mode to p and
CMJ the exposure compensation setting to zero (±O) before setting
a custom white balance. The correct white balance may not
be obtained when the exposure setting is incorrect (image
appears completely black or white).
• Shoot with the same settings as when reading the white
balance data. If the settings differ, the optimal white balance
may not be set. In particular, the following should not be
changed.
-ISO Speed
- Flash: Setting the flash to on or off is recommended. If the
flash fires when reading the white balance data with the
flash set to Auto or Auto with Red- Eye Reduction, make
sure that you also use the flash when you shoot.
• Since the white balance data cannot be read in Stitch Assist
mode, preset the white balance in another shooting mode
beforehand.
• The camera will retain the custom white balance setting that
you record even if you reset the camera to the default settings
(p.34).
II
»
c.
<
Q)
~
n
(I)
c.
en
"3'
o
o
~
~
cc
."
C
~
....c)"
n
~
tn
79

You can alter the overall impression of an image and shoot.
My Colors Settings
a My Colors Off Records normally.
-
BE Vivid Emphasizes the contrast and color saturation to record bold colors.
Neutral Tones down the contrast and color saturation to record neutral
hues.
e Sepia Records in sepia tones.
II BIW Records in black and white.
Positive Film Produces intense natural-appearing colors like those obtained
II with positive film.
a Lighter Skin Tone* Makes skin tones lighter.
~ Darker Skin Tone* Makes skin tones darker.
Vivid Blue Emphasize blue tints.
g Use to make blue subjects, such as the sky or ocean, more vivid.
Vivid Green Emphasize green tints.
~ Use to make green subjects, such as mountains, new growth,
flowers and lawns, more vivid.
Vivid Red Emphasize red tints.
~ Use to make red subjects, such as flowers or cars, more vivid.
Custom Color Customize contrast, sharpness, and saturation, and red, green,
blue, and skin tone* balance.
II Use to make subtle adjustments, such as making blue colors
more vivid and face colors brighter.
* If the image contains colors that are the same as human skin, those colors
will also be changed.
11 Also you may not obtain the expected results depending on the skin color.
1 FUNC. Menu .. _* (My Colors Off).

• Use the ~ or ~ button to select a My

Colors mode.
80

.~ Mode
Setting the Camera to a Custom Color Mode (p. 81).
• Other than ~ Mode
Press the FUNC. button to return to the shooting screen and
begin shooting.
* Default setting.
Ii¥I The ISO speed will increase with some settings, which may
LMJ increase the noise in the image.
Setting the Camera to a Custom Color Mode
You can adjust the contrast, sharpness, saturation, red, green,
blue, or skin tone balance and shoot.
1 ~ (Custom Color) .. SET

button.
II
»
c.
<
Q)
::::J
2 Use the .. or ... button to (')
CD
C.
select [Contrast], [Sharpness],
[Saturation], [Red], [Green],
rn
..
::::T
[Blue], or [Skin Tone] and the o
o
....- or ~ button to make :i"
adjustments. to
• The altered color will display. I .I "
..
C
Select an Adjust the ::::J
item to selected (')
adjust. item. c)"
-=------------------ ::::J
3Press the SET button. t/)
81

Although the built-in flash will fire with automatic flash adjustments
(except in the M mode), it is also possible to set it so that it fires
without any adjustments.
1 L!J (Ree.) Menu +- [Flash Adjust]

+- [Auto]*/[Manual].
v _ ~
Corn Sr,ootlng Q
Self-trne( (10
spot AE POlnt C211ter
* Default setting.
• When the shooting mode is set to " , tA , ~ , cQ, P or

when [Flash Adjust] is set to [Auto] in Tv or Av mode,
Flash Exposure settings can be adjusted in 1/3-stop increments in the range
Compensation of -2 to +2 stops.
• You can combine the flash exposure compensation with the
camera's exposure compensation function to achieve creative
effects which compensate for background exposure.
• When Shooting mode is set to M or when [Flash Adjust] is
Flash Output set to [Manual] in Tv or Av mode, the flash output can be
controlled in three steps, starting from FULL, when shooting.
82

1 FUNC. Menu .. ~ (Flash)1
~ (Flash Output).
• Adjust the compensation/output using

the ..... or ~ button and press the
FUNC. button.
e.g. [Flash Adjust]
set to [Auto]
tV! Flash Output
jL .;;;;.~-.;-- __ -'- J FU:"'t.
e.g. [Flash Adjust]

set to [Manual]
~_!y._~y._~J II
1st-curtain The flash fires right after the shutter opens, regardless of the shutter
»
c.
speed. Usually, the 1st-curtain is used when shooting.
<
Q)
~
The flash fires right before the shutter closes. Compared with the 1st- (")
(I)
2nd-curtain curtain, the flash fires later and allows you to shoot images in which, for c.
example, a car's taillights seem to trail off behind. en
~
o
,o.....
1 L!J (Rec.) Menu .. [Flash Sync] +- [1st-curtainfl :i.
[2nd-curtain]. ce
See Menus and Settings (p. 27) ~
~
(")
pt.-
e)"
~
en
Image shot with the Image shot with the

1st-curtain setting 2nd-curtain setting
* Default setting.
83

Shooting Images at Set Intervals
(Intervalometer)
PTv AvM
You can shoot images at a set interval. This function can be used for
fixed-point observation of plants and blooming flowers. The shooting
interval time can be set from 1* to 60 minutes and 2* to 100 images
can be shot.
* Default setting
1 L!J (Rae.) Menu ..

[Intervalometer].
, -
Set Shortcut button
Save SeHW9S
2 [Interval Time] and [No. of shots]

.. SET button.
• If you press the ..... or ~ button
continuously, the number of shots
changes in units of 5 shots at a time.
• The maximum number of shots * is
determined by the available space on
the memory card.
* The maximum number of shots may be reduced according to
the images already shot.
• The camera exits the menu screen and Int. appears at the lower
right of the LCD monitor (or viewfinder).
84

3 Press the shutter button.
• The first image is shot and the interval shooting session starts.
Once the first image is shot, the power is turned off until the next
shot, and the LCD monitor (or viewfinder) turns off. (The power
automatically turns on immediately before the next shot.)
• Once the set number of shots is taken the camera automatically
powers down regardless of the power saving function settings.
• If the following operations are accessed while the interval shooting
is in process, the interval shooting session will be canceled.
- Turning the mode dial while the camera is waiting to shoot the
next image
- Opening the memory card slot or battery cover
- Operating the mode lever
- Turning off the power
85

You can save frequently used shooting modes and various shooting
settings to the C (Custom) mode. When necessary, you can then
shoot images with previously saved settings by simply turning the
mode dial to C. Settings that are not memorized when the shooting
mode is changed or when the power is turned off (such as continuous
shooting or self-timer) are also remembered.
1 Switch to the shooting mode you wish to save and set

the settings.
• To change some of the settings saved in C (other than shooting
mode), select C.
- Functions which can be saved in C
- Shooting mode (P, Tv , Av, M)
- Items which can be set in P, Tv, Av and M modes (p. 167)
- Rec. menu settings
- Zoom location
- Manual focus location
2 L!1 (Rec.) Menu • [Save 'v
Settings]. is 'k.:de CC0tl n'J':J'JS

See Menus and Settings (p. 27) Cor,v;;it?f Q.f- t
Inte(vala"i:;~sr
Custom G::solay
3 [OK] • SET button.
ri¥l- The setting contents do not influence other shooting modes.

LjJ - Saved settings can be reset (p. 34).
86

Your camera is equipped with an Intelligent Orientation sensor that
detects the orientation of an image shot with the camera held
vertically and automatically rotates it to the correct orientation when
viewing it in the LCD monitor (or viewfinder).
1 iii (Set up) Menu" [Auto Rotate]

• [On]*/[Off].
v w_
• When the Auto Rotate function is set to lar.gu3;8 ~ng':'lsh

[On] and the LCD monitor (or \hdec Systew NBC
viewfinder) is set to the detailed
display mode, the 0 (normal), D(right
e
Pnnt Method Auto
end is down) or (left end is down) will appear in the display.

II
* Default setting. »
c.
<
S»
:::s
(")
CD
c.
en
:::r
o
,o...
;;/x// /i//>/;;;;/</ ;~i~_j'_~~~~j1~S%~~!_!~~('~~~!'\<~'~<~~~~~ll~({:0)i~W; !!·~;i<~'~\jl'jjP;i>i\~!?r;ij2Ci')iij~<j~j):~x< ~ •
."
C
:::s
,...
(")
()"
:::s
tn
87

ri¥l • When the camera is held vertically to shoot, the Intelligent
UJ Orientation sensor judges the upper end to be "up" and the
lower end to be "down". It then regulates the optimal white
balance, exposure, and focus for vertical photography. This
function operates regardless of the on/off status of the Auto
Rotate function .
• The Auto Rotate function can be set forthe shooting and
playback modes separately.
- When the Auto Rotate function is set to [On] in shooting
mode, the orientation of the camera is recorded when the
shot is taken. Therefore, the image is automatically rotated
during playback mode based on the orientation of the
camera during shooting.
- When the Auto Rotate function is set to [On] in playback
mode, images will be rotated to their correct orientation in
the LCD monitor (or viewfinder) regardless of the camera's
orientation when shooting.
You can create a new folder at any time and the recorded images will
be automatically saved to that folder.
Create New Creates a new folder the next time you shoot images. To create an
Folder additional folder, insert another check mark.
Auto Create To create a new folder the next time you shoot after a specified date and
time, specify a date and time (p. 89).
1 iii (Set up) Menu. [Create

Folder].
88

Create a Folder the Next Time You Shoot
2 Use the ~ or ~ to place a check Create Folder
mark beside [Create New Folder]
.. Menu button.
• t!i displays in the LCD monitor (or ~\i.') 'Jeih8
viewfinder). The symbol will cease to

display after the new folder is created. ~Imlt:)
Setting the Day or Time for Automatic Folder

Creation
2 Select a day for the [Auto Create]
option and a time in the [Time]
option • Menu button.
• t!1 displays in the LCD monitor (or
viewfinder) when the specified time
arrives. The symbol will cease to
II
»
display after the new folder is created. Q.
<
D)
~
(")
Ii¥l Up to 2000 images can be saved into one folder. A new folder CD
Q.
CMJ will automatically be created when you record more than that en
number. ::::r
o
o
.....
:i"
CQ
."
C
~
.....
(")
o·
~
tn
89

The images you shoot are automatically assigned file numbers. You
can select how the file number is assigned.
1 W(Set up) Menu. [File

Numbering] .. [Continuous]*1/
[Auto Reset].
Auto Rotate On
DIstance VflltS flt:m
Language EnglIsh
*1 Default setting.
File No. Reset Function

A number one higher than the last one recorded is assigned to the next
Continuous image. This is convenient for managing all your images together on a
computer because you avoid file name duplication when changing folders
or memory cards. *2
Auto Reset The image and folder number are reset to the starting value (100-0001)*2.
This is convenient for managing images on afolder-by-folder basis.
*2 When a blank memory card is used. If a memory card with recorded data is
used, the 7-digit number for the last recorded folder and image is compared
with the last one on the card, and the larger of the two is utilized as the basis
for new images.
90

File and Folder Numbers
Recorded images are assigned consecutive file numbers starting
with 0001 and ranging up to 9999, while folders are assigned
numbers starting with 100 and ranging up to 999. Up to 2,000 images
can be saved into a single folder.
Created Memory Card Exchanged
New Folder Created
for Another
Continuous Memory Card 1 Memory Card 1 Memory Card 2
Auto Reset Memory Card 1 Memory Card 1 Memory Card 2
• Images may be saved to a new folder when there is insufficient free

space even if the total number of images in a folder is less than
II
»
2,000 because the following types of images are always saved Q.
together into the same folder. ~
• Continuous shooting • Self-timer images (~ (custom)) ~
• Movies (still images of movies) • Stitch Assist mode images ~
• Color Accent/Color Swap still images (with [Save Original] set to [On]) en
• Focus Bracketing go
• AEB shooting
....
0
• Images cannot be played back when the folder numbers are :i"
duplicated or image numbers are duplicated within folders. ~
• Please refer to the Software Starter Guide for information regarding c
folder structures or image types. ~
....
o·::::J
en
91

I Playback/Erasing
See the Basic Guide (p. 14).
Q Viewing Magnified Images
1 Press the (~ button.

• @II%- will display and a magnified
portion of the image will display.
• You can change the magnification
level with the zoom lever.
• Images can be magnified up to a
factor of approximately 10x.
Approximate Location of
the Magnified Area
Use the~, T, .... or ~ button to move around the

image.
image advance mode and _0-

• If you press the SET button once more, the camera switches to
will display.
You can use the <lllII or ~ button to advance to the next or
previous image at the same level of magnification.
The image advance mode cancels when you press the SET
button again.
To Cancel the Magnified Display: Turn the zoom lever toward ~.
(You can also cancel it immediately by pressing the MENU button.)
92
~ Viewing Images in Sets of Nine
(Index Playback)
1 Turn the zoom lever toward
~.
• Up to nine images can be
viewed at once in index
playback. Selected
• Use the ... , T, ..... or ~ button Image
to change the image selection.
Movie
Switch the display nine images at a time

If you turn the zoom lever towards ~
during index playback, the jump bar
'appears and you can switch between the
sets of nine images.
• View the previous or next nine images
using ..... or ~ button .
• Hold the SET button down and press
the ..... or ~ button to jump to the first or Jump Bar
last set.
To Cancel the Magnified Display: Turn the zoom lever toward ~.
93

~ Jumping to Images
When you have many images recorded onto a memory card, it is handy
to use the four search keys below to jump over images to find the object
of your search.
~ Jump 10 Images Jumps over 10 images at a time.

~ Jump 100 Images Jumps over 100 images at a time.
rei Jump Shot Date Jumps to the first image with the next shooting date.
ra Jump to Movie Jumps to a movie.
il Jump to Folder Displays the first image in each folder.
1 In Single Image playback

mode, press the ~ button.
• The camera will switch to jump
search mode.
• The scree'n sample will vary
slightly according to the search
key.
Position of currently
displayed image
Number of images
matching search key.
Use the .. or • button to select a search key and

press the ~ or ~ button.
To Return to Single Image Playback: Press the MENU button.
94

Viewing Movies
Display a movie and press the

SET button.
elmages with a @D~ icon are movies.
Movie Control Panel-

Speaker volume
(Adjust with the'" or
T button)
2 Select a (Play) and- press the SET button.

e The movie will pause if you press the SET button during
playback. It will resume when you press the button again.
e When playback ends, the movie stops at the last frame dis Played.1II
Press the SET button to display the movie control panel.
"'tJ
Operating the Movie Control Panel Dr
'<
tT
~ Exit (Single image playback) Q)
n
Print (Only appears when connected to a printer. For details, refer to your Direct ~
!! Print documentation.) m
a Play SiJ
en
:i.
Slow Motion Playback (You can use the ~ button to slow down or the ~ button to
[J] speed up playback.) cc
mDisplays the first frame
[II) Previous Frame (Rewinds if the SET button is held down)
II]] Next Frame (Fast Forwards if the SET button is held down)
[D Displays the last frame
ei Edit (Switches to movie editing mode) (p. 96)
15¥1 e Use the television's controls to adjust the volume when
CjJ playing a movie on a TV set (p. 116).
e The sound cannot be played in slow motion playback.
95

Editing Movies
You can delete portions of recorded movies.
Select BS
(Edit) in the movie Movie Editing Panel
control panel and press the SET
button.
• The movie editing panel and the
movie editing bar will display.
Movie Editing Bar I

Counter
2 Use the. or T button to select. (Cut Beginning) or

IIA (Cut End) and the .... or ~ button to specify the
point (,) at which to cut.
• To check a temporarily edited movie, select a (Play) and press
the SET button.
• Selecting (1m
Exit) cancels the edit and restores the movie
control panel.
3 Select (IJ (Save) and press the SET button.
96

4 Select [New File] or [Overwrite]
and press the SET button.
• [New File] saves the edited movie
under a new file name. The pre-edit
data is left unchanged. Note, if you
press the SET button while saving the
movie, saving is canceled.
• [Overwrite] saves the edited movie
with its original name. The pre-edit data is lost.
• When there is not enough space left on the memory card, only
[Overwrite] can be selected, and'" appears on the counter of the
movie editing bar
ra¥llt may take approximately 3 minutes to save an edited movie.

L..iJ If the battery runs out of charge partway through, edited
movieclips cannot be saved. When editing movies, it is
recommended to use new size-AA alkaline batteries, or fully
charged size-AA NiMH batteries, or the separately sold
Compact Power Adapter CA-PS700 (p. 139).
II
97

Rotating Images in the Display
Images can be rotated clockwise 90° or 270° in the display.
Original 90 0 270 0
1 [g] (Play) Menu .11. ~ ~~

See Menus and Settings (p. 27) ~,Ily Colors
~ Sound Recorder
Use the ~ or ~ button to select an

image to rotate and press the SET
button to rotate it.
e Cycle through the 90° .....270° .....original
orientations with each press of the SET
button.
elmages can be rotated in index
playback.
98

Applying Effects and Playing Back
You can apply such effects as fade in, and then play back your movies.
=
mIl Play back the movie without applying effects.
Allows you to apply a fade (fade-in) while transitioning between scenes.
~ II Allows you to apply a movement effect that transitions scenes right with the .....
~ button and left with the ~ button.
1g (Play) Menu. (] +- mD/[~~](1

~
* Default setting.
ri¥l The transition effect will not display when an image is switched
LiI while the camera is reading an image from the memory card.
99

Adding My Colors Effects
You can add effects to recorded images (stills only) using the My
Colors function. The following selection of My Colors effects is
available. For details, see p. 80.
SM Vivid g Lighter Skin Tone

BI Neutral BI Darker Skin Tone
II Sepia ~ Vivid Blue
BIW sm Vivid Green
"1Bm Positive Film
[g] (Play) Menu +-

§! Vivid Red
=.
...... w"" .....
Protect
O-n
@Rotate
Use the .... or ~ button to select

an image, and press the SET
button.
3-U~e th;~-~~;b~tton-~-;~;~t
the My Colors type, and press the
SET button .
• The displayed image will reflect the My
Colors effect.
• You can turn the zoom lever toward ~
to check the image at a higher
magnification. While the image is
zoomed, you can press the SET button to switch between the
image transformed with the My Colors effect and the original
non-transformed image.
100

4 Select [OK], and press the SET
button.
• The newly saved image transformed
with the My Colors effect will be the
last one in the list.
• To continue adding effects to other
images, repeat the procedures from
Step 2 onward.
5 Press the MENU button and

select [Yes] or [No], then press
the SET button.
• Selecting [Yes] displays the image
transformed with the My Colors effect,
while [No] returns you to the Play
menu.
Iifl. The My COlor.s function will not work if there is insufficient

LMJ space on the memory card .
• Although My Colors effects can be added any number of
times to an image, the image quality will gradually deteriorate
with each application and the intended colors may not be
achieved .
• Color in images taken using My Colors (p. 80) in shooting
mode and images edited with the My Colors function in
playback mode may differ slightly.
101

~ Attaching Sound Memos to Images
In Playback mode (including single image playback, index playback,
magnified playback and the review immediately after shooting in
Shooting mode) you can attach sound memos (up to 1 minute) to an
image. The sound data is saved in WAVE format (stereo).
1 Press the t button while playing back images.

The sound memo control panel will display.
2 Use the ..... or ~ button to select

[] (Record) and press the SET
button.
• The elapsed time and the remaining
time display.
• Pressing the SET button pauses the
recording. Pressing it again resumes
recording. Sound Memo
Panel
• Up to 1 minute of recordings can be Elapsed Time!
added to anyone image. Remaining Time
• The sound mode can be changed Volume
(p.50). (Adjust with the'" or ...
button)
Sound Memo Panel

1m Exit
[J Record
C Pause
a Play
I'Jtj] Erase
Iml Select [Erase] in the confirmation screen and press the SET button.
102

Sound-Only Recording (Sound Recorder)
You can record sound (stereo) only, without images, for up to two
hours at one time.
1g (Play) Menu .U.

@ Rota~e
2 Use the "lllII or ~ button to

select [] (Record) from the
Sound Control Panel and
press the SET button.
• The recording starts and the
elapsed time is displayed.
• The sound mode can be changed
(p. 50).
Available
Recording
Sound mode II
• When you press the SET button, Time ."
recording stops. Press the SET Sound Control Panel ~
button again to start a new C"
Q)
recording. n
Pressing the shutter button halfway, or pressing the movie ~
button will also stop recording.
m
Dl
tn
S·
15¥1 • The maximum recording time depends on the space available CQ
I..jJ on the memory card, and the sound mode.
• Recording stops when the memory card is full.
• From the Playback mode, the Sound Control Panel can be
displayed by holding the t button.
103

Sound Playback
1g (Play) Menu +- n.
2 Use the£. or ... button to Recording

select a sound and select a Shooting Time Length
I I
with the ~ or ~ button, and
The sound plays.
II (Exit): Returns to the Play
menu.
[ ] (Record): Records sound.
CI (Play): Plays sound.
m (Rewind): Hold the SET button
to rewind (no sound
plays).
m (Fast Forward): Hold the SET
button to fast
forward (no sound plays)
II (Erase): Press the SET button, press the'" or" button to
select [Erase], and press the SET button again to
erase the selected sound. If you select [Erase
All] and press the SET button, a confirmation
screen displays. Press the'" or .. button to
select [OK] and press the SET button to erase all
unprotected sound.
iii (Protect): Press the SET button to protect the selected
sound from erasure (~ appears). To remove
protection, press the SET button again.
g (Volume): Press the .. or T button to adjust the volume.
- Play volume can be adjusted with [Volume] on the [W (Set
up)] menu (p. 31).
104

J5¥1 For details on the sound number and folder number, refer to the
LMJ Software Starter Guide.
Automated Playback (Slide Shows)

The images on a memory card can be displayed automatically.
* Slide show image settings are based on DPOF standards (p. 111).
Types of Slide Shows
~ All Images Plays all images on the memory card in order.

Date Starts the slide show from the specified date, in the order
taken.
Folders Uses the images in the specified folder, and displays them in
Ll their folder order.
~ Movies Uses all the movies on the specified memory card.
~ Still Images Uses all the images on the specified memory card.
Custom 1-3 Mark only the images that you would like to see in the slide
Uto
D
show and save the selections in [Custom 1], [Custom 2], or
[Custom 3J (p. 108). II
-a
Dr
1g (Play) Menu .11. '<
C"
See Menus and Settings (p. 27) Q)
(")
25:
m
D1
til
:i"
. _ - - - - - - - - - - - - - CQ
2 Select from ~, , Ll, ~, ~, or
DtoD.
• For and L:]: Select the date or
folder to play images from (p. 107).
• For D
to D:
Select the images to
play (p. 108).
• To add effects and play back, select
[Effect] with the .. button, and select
the type of effect with the ~ or ~ button (p. 106).
105

3 [Start] .. SET button.
• The following can be performed during
automated playback.
- Pause/resume the slide show: Press
the SET button
- Move on to next/go back to previous:
Press the ..... or ~ button (Hold the
button down to go faster)
- Stop the slide show: Press the MENU button
Types of Effects
When the following screen appears, you can apply effects to your
slide show.
II Playback begins automatically without using effects.

is * Applies a down-up fade of the image, the image appears from the bottom up.
c::= At first, a cross appears on the image and the image appears gradually.
C The image gradually appears horizontally. '
* Default setting.
Ii¥l During single image playback, simultaneously pressing the SET

LJJ and ~1tV'
buttons begins a slide show from the first image.
However, if you do this when the last taken image is displayed,
playback begins by the first image taken the same day as the
one displayed.
106

Select the date/folder to play images from ( ,[j)
1 Select or [j .. SET button.
2 Use the ~ or ~ button to select the date or folder to
play images from .. MENU button.
Date Folder
II
107

Select images for the Slide Show <0 to D)
Select only the images that you wish to play back and save them
as a slide show (Custom 1,2 or 3). Up to 998 images can be
selected. They will be played back in their order of selection.
1 Select 0 to D .. SET button.

• Only the 0 icon will display at first. When you set 0, the
icon will change to rm
and n will display. nand D will
change in the same way when they are set.
2 Use the ~ or ~ button to move Check mark

indicating selection
between images for playback
Number indicating
and the SET button to select or the selection order
deselect them.
• You can also select images in the
index playback mode.
• Pressing the MENU button cancels
the setting.
ri¥l Selecting All Images

LiJ1. After selecting 0 to D in step 1 (p. 108), use the ..
button to select [Mark all] and press the SET button.
2. Use the" button to select [Mark all], press the SET
button.
3. Use the ~ button to select [OK] and press the SET button.
To deselect all images, select [Reset].
108

Adjusting the Play Time and Repeat Settings
• Play Time
Sets the duration that each image displays. Choose between 3*-10
seconds, 15 seconds and 30 seconds. (Displaying time can vary
slightly depending on the image.)
* Default setting .
• Repeat
Sets whether the slide show stops when all the slides have been
displayed or continues until stopped.
1 [Set up] • SET button.
2 Select [Play Time] or [Repeat]

and then the desired option .
• Pressing the MENU button cancels
the setting.
Protecting Images
You can protect important images and movies from accidental
erasure.
1 [gJ (Play) Menu • • . rYe:

See Menus and Settings (p. 27) L"I TranSlhon 1~~),~
~ Sllde Snm.
<i~ My Calors.
109

2 Sel~ct an image you want to
protect using the ~ or ~ button.
• Pressing the SET button again cancels
the setting.
• You can also protect images in the
Protection Icon
Please note that formatting (initializing) a memory card erases all

data (p. 35), including protected images and other file types. Please
check the contents of a memory card before formatting it.
Erasing All Images
g (Play) Menu • II.

[OK] +- SET button.

• To exit instead of erasing, select
[Cancel].
IE¥l Please format the memory card when you want to erase not
LiJ only image data but also all the data contained on the card
(p.35).
110

IPrint SettingslTransfer Settings
Setting the DPOF Print Settings
You can select images on a memory card for printing and specify the
number of print copies in advance using the camera. The settings
used on the camera comply with the Digital Print Order Format
(DPOF) standards. This is extremely convenient for printing on a
direct print compatible printer, or for sending the images to a photo
developing service that supports DPOF. These settings are compliant
with DPOF (Digital Print Order Format).
The A icon may display for a memory card with print

settings set by a different DPOF-compliant camera. These
settings will be overwritten by those set by your camera.
Single Images
1g (Play) Mode .. PI (Print)

Menu • [Select Images & Qty.].
• Selecting [Clear All Selections]

cancels all print settings for the
images.
Using the ~ or ~ button to select Number of Print Copies CIJ

(I)
images for printing. :=.
~
• As shown below, selection methods (Q
differ for the Print Type settings t/)
(p. 113).
- [IJ (Standard)/[IJ ~ (Both) ~~
t/)
Select an image and press the SET
button to select or deselect it.
ar..,
CIJ
(I)
:=
~.
(Q
t/)
111

- lm (Index) Index Print Selection
Select an image and press the SET
button to select or deselect it.
• If the camera is connected to a printer,
the ~¢V' button lights blue during
image selection. Printing starts after
pressing the SET button once the
~¢V' button is pressed and [Print]
selection is confirmed.
All the Images on a Memory Card
1 [g] (Play) Mode • rI (Print) Menu .. [Select All

Images].
• One copy of every image will be set to
print.
• Selecting [Clear All Selections]
cancels all print settings for the
images. -- ...... ..,
Prmt Settlfl9s
• If the camera is connected to a printer, 00 (OPDE)
the ~¢V' button lights blue after the
SET button is pressed. Printing starts
after pressing the SET button once the
~¢V' button is pressed and [Print]
selection is confirmed.
2 [OK] • SET button.
Jifl. The images are printed in order from oldest to newest by the
I...iI date and time they were shot.
• A maximum of 998 images can be selected .
• When [Print Type] is set to [Both], the number of copies can
be set. When it is set to [Index], the number of copies cannot
be set (only one copy will be printed).
112

Setting the Print Style
Specify the print style before selecting the image to print.
The following print settings can be selected.
* Default setting
lI] Standard* Prints one image per page.

Prints the selected images together at a reduced size in
~ Index
Print Type an index format.
Prints the images in both the standard and index
lI]~ Both
formats.
Date (On/Off) Adds the date to the print.
File No. (On/Off) Adds the file number to the print.
Clear DPOF data (On*/Off) Clears all print style settings after printing is complete.
1 [g (Play) Mode • R (Print)

Menu • [Print Settings].
2 Select [Print Type], [Date], [File

No.], or [Clear DPOF data] and
then select the settings.
en
CD
:=
:i"
(Q
t/)
113

1i¥1- The Date and File No. settings will change according to the
(jJ Print Type as follows. However, the printable information may
vary between printers.
-Index
[Date] and [File No.] cannot be set to [On] at the same time.
- Standard or Both
[Date] and [File No.] can be set at the same time.
- Do not set the date in the DPOF print settings when printing
images that have had the date embedded with the [Date
Stamp] function. This may cause the date to be printed twice.
• Dates print in the style specified in the [Date/Time] menu
(p.31).
Setting the DPOF Transfer Settings

You can use the camera to specify settings for images before
downloading to a computer. Refer to the Software Starter Guide for
instructions on how to transfer images to your computer.
The settings used on the camera comply with the Digital Print Order
Format (DPOF) standards.
The A icon may display for a memory card with transfer
settings set by a different DPOF-compliant camera. These
settings will be overwritten by those set by your camera.
1g (Play) Menu +- B. N~t

See Menus and Settings (p. 27) d Yy Colors
~ SOJ'1d Recorder
O-n or-orser
@ R(Jtal~
114

Single Images
--------_.
2 [Order] .. SET button.
• Selecting [Reset] cancels all transfer
order settings.
3 Use the ~ 0; ~ butt~~ to select Transfer Selection

an image to transfer • SET
button.
• Pressing the SET button again
deselects the setting.
index playback mode (p. 93).
All the Images on a Memory Card
2 Select [Mark all] and press the

SET button.
• Selecting [Reset] cancels all transfer
order settings.
3 Select [OK] and press the SET button.

f5¥1. The images are transferred in order from oldest to newest by
LjI the date and time they were shot.
• A maximum of 998 images can be selected.
115

IShootinglViewing Images on a TV set
You can use a video-compatible television as a monitor to shoot or
play back images when it is connected to the camera with the
supplied StereoNideo Cable STV-250N.
1 Turn off the camera and the TV.

2 Connect the StereoNideo Cable
to the camera's AN OUT terminal.
• With your fingernail on the left edge of
the camera's AN OUT terminal cover,
pull it forward to open it, and plug the
StereoNideo Cable in all the way.
3 Plug the other ends of the StereoNideo Cable into the

VIDEO IN and AUDIO IN jacks on the TV.
~~
To the Video IN Jack
Plug (Yellow)
~~
To the Audio IN Jack
Plug (Left) (White)
To the Audio IN Jack
Plug (Right) (Red)
4 Turn on the TV and switch it to Video mode.

5 Power on the camera.
Ii¥l • The video output signal can be switched (NTSC or PAL) to
LiJ accommodate different regional standards (p. 32). The
default setting varies between regions.
- NTSC: Japan, U.S.A., Canada, Taiwan and others
- PAL: Europe, Asia (excluding Taiwan), Oceania and others
• If the video system is set incorrectly, the camera output may
not display properly.
116

I Customizing the Camera (My Camera Settings)
My Camera allows you to customize the start-up image and the
startup, operation, self-timer, and shutter sounds. You can change
and register these settings, enabling you to customize the camera to ~
suit your own tastes. ~
o
Changing My Camera Settings 3
N'
s·
1g mode • Em (My Camera) cc
....::s-
Menu • Menu Item.
See Menus and Settings (p. 27) CD
o
r»
3
CD
DJ
2 Use the ~ or ~ button to select the

contents you wish to set.
Select [Theme] to set all to the same
settings.
Registering My Camera Settings

Images recorded onto the memory card and newly recorded sounds
can be added as My Camera settings to the m
and EM menu items.
You can also use the supplied software to upload your computer's
images and sounds to the camera.
Ii¥I A computer is required to restore the My Camera settings to the

~ defaults. Use the supplied software (ZoomBrowser EX!
ImageBrowser) to restore the default settings to the camera.
117

1 [g] mode +- Em (My Camera)
Menu • Menu Item to register.
2 Select mor EM and press DISP.

button.
3 Select an image or record a

sound.
• Start-up Image
Select the image you wish to register
and press the SET button .
• Start-up, Operation, Self-timer and

Shutter Sounds
Select 0 (Record) and press the SET
button. After recording, select ~
(Register Sound) and press the SET
button.
- Recording will automatically stop
when the recording time elapses.
- To play it, select a
(Play).
- To exit instead of registering, press 1m (Exit).
118

4 Select [OK] and press the SET
button.
• To cancel registering, select [Cancel].
oC
....otn
3
N·
:i"
(Q
....:::r
CD
o
D)
3
CD
Dl
15¥1 See the supplied Software Starter Guide for more information "i
L..jJ on creating and adding to the My Camera data. '<
o
D)
3
CD
Dl
en
CD
:=
S·
(Q
~
119

ITroubleshooting
Camera
Power is not turned on. • Press the power button for a moment
(Basic Guide p. 3).
Memory card slot or battery • Confirm that the memory card slot cover or battery
cover is open. cover is securely closed (Basic Guide p. 1).
Batteries are loaded in the • Put batteries back into the camera in the correct
wrong direction. direction (Basic Guide p. 1).
Batteries are not the right type. • Use only unused AA-size alkaline batteries or
Canon AA-size NiMH batteries. (Basic Guide p. 1).
Insufficient battery voltage • Insert the four unused or fully charged AA-size
("Change the batteries" NiMH batteries into the camera (Basic Guide p. 1).
message displays). • Use the Compact Power Adapter (sold separately)
(p.139).
Poor contact between camera • Polish the terminals with asoft cotton swab before
and battery terminals. charging or using the battery (p. 132).
• Reinsert the batteries several times.
120

When the power is turned on
LCD monitor/Viewfinder
Aslow shutter speed has likely • Tum the Image Stabilizer function on (p. 39).
been selected because of • Increase the ISO speed (p. 69), enable the flash, or
insufficient lighting. use atripod to stabilize the camera
(Basic Guide p. 11).
121

The camera automatically • There is no effect on the recorded image.
brightened the image displayed
on the LCD monitor (or
viewfinder) to make it easier to
see when shooting in a dark
area (p. 19).
Shooting
Camera is in Playback or • Turn the mode lever to the left or press the shutter
computer/printer connection button halfway to switch to Shooting mode.
mode. • During a computer or printer connection,
disconnect the interface cable before switching
the camera to Shooting mode.
Flash is charging. (Blinking • Wait until ~ stops blinking and lights steadily,
white ~ on LCD monitor/in signaling that the flash is charged, then press the
viewfinder). shutter button.
Memory card full. • Insert a new memory card (Basic Guide p. 1).
• If required, download the images to a computer
and erase them from the memory card to make
space.
Memory card is not formatted • Format the memory card (p. 35).
correctly. • If reformatting does not work, the memory card logic
circuits may be damaged. Consult the nearest
Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
SO memory card is write • Slide the write protect tab of the SO memory card
protected. upward (p. 133).
122

AF-assist Beam is set to [Off]. • In dark places where it is difficult for the camera to
focus, the AF-assist Beam will emit to assist
focusing. As the AF-assist Beam will not function
when turned off, set it [On] to activate it (p. 28).
Take care not to obstruct the AF-assist Beam with
your hand when used.
The camera moves when the • Set the image stabilizer function to any other setting
shutter button is pressed. than [Off] (p. 39).
• Increase the ISO speed to increase the shutter speed.
• Setting the self-timer to ~ (2 seconds) delays the
shutter release for 2 seconds and allows the camera
to stop shaking, thus preventing ablurred image
(p.43).
• Even better results can be obtained by placing the
camera on astable surface or by using atripod to
shoot.
Subject is out of focal range. • Shoot with the subject at the correct shooting
distance (p. 146).
The subject is hard to focus on. • Use the focus lock, AF lock or manual focus to
shoot (p. 64). a
I:
e-
m
tn
Subject is too close, making the • Raise the flash and set it so that it always fires :::r
flash too strong. (Basic Guide p. 11). o
o
.....
Subject is under exposed due • Set the exposure compensation to a positive (+) S·
to the surrounding area being setting (p. 75). cc
too bright. • Use the AE lock or spot metering function
(pp. 70, 73).
Subject is too far away for flash • Shoot within correct shooting distance of the
to reach. subject when using the internal flash (p. 147).
• Raise the ISO speed and then shoot (p. 69).
123

Subject is too close, making the • Shoot within correct shooting distance of the
flash too strong. subject when using the internal flash (p. 147).
Subject is over exposed due to • Set the exposure compensation to a negative (-)
the surrounding area being too setting (p. 75).
dark. • Use the AE lock or the spot metering function
(pp. 70, 73).
Light is shining directly on the • Change the shooting angle.
subject or reflected off the
subject into the camera.
Flash is set to on. • Push down the flash to off @ (Flash off)
(Basic Guide p. 11).
ISO speed is too high. • Selecting high ISO speeds or ~ (High ISO
Auto) may increase the amount of noise in an
image. When picture quality is the priority, select
lower ISO speeds (p. 69).
• In ~, rI, PI! and IJ modes of Special Scene
mode, the ISO speed increases and noise may
occur.
Light reflecting back from eyes • Under these conditions, use the @ red-eye
can make them appear red reduction mode (Basic Guide p. 11). For this mode
when the flash is used in dark to be effective, the subject must be looking right at
areas. the red-eye reduction lamp. Try asking them to
look directly at the lamp.
• Even better results can be obtained by increasing
the lighting in indoor settings or approaching
closer to the subject.
124

Memory card slot cover or • First close the memory card slot cover or battery
battery cover was opened with cover, turn the power on, and then turn the power
power on. off again (Basic Guide p. 1).
Interval shooting session is in • The lens will automatically retract when the
progress. specified number of images are taken.
The mode was switched from • The lens will not retract in this case. To retract the
shooting to playback mode. lens, turn the mode lever to the left again.
~
c
C"
CD
tn
::r'
o
...S·
o
cc
125

Shooting Movies
The following types of memory • Although the recording time may not display
cards are used. properly during shooting, the movie will be
- Slow recording cards. recorded correctly on the memory card. Recording
- Cards formatted on adifferent time will display properly if you format the memory
camera or a computer. card in this camera (excluding slow recording
- Cards which have had memory cards) (p. 35).
images recorded and erased
repeatedly.
When the camera's internal • Try the following procedures.

memory is low, the "Buffer - Format the card with a low level format before
Warning" displays until it is full, filming (p. 35).
and shooting will automatically - Lower the recording pixels/frame rate (p. 48).
stop. - Use a high-speed memory card (SDC-512MSH,
etc.).
Playback
You attempted to play back • Computer images that cannot be played back will
images shot with another play back if they are added to the camera using
camera or images edited with a the bundled software program ZoomBrowser EX
computer. or ImageBrowser.
See ZoomBrowser EXllmageBrowser Software
User Guide (PDF).
File name was changed with a • Set the file name or location to a file format
computer or file location was compatible with the camera. (Refer to the
changed. Software Starter Guide for details).
Some movies shot with another camera cannot be edited.
126

Movies recorded with large recording pixels and high frame rates may momentarily stop
playing if played on slow reading memory cards.
You may experience frame dropping when playing back a movie on a computer with
insufficient system resources.
~Wd Images shot with this camera may not play back properly on other cameras.
Movies recorded at ~2~d setting • To check the images at the original frame rate, you
and with the video signal set to are recommended to play the movie back on the
the PAL format, may play back camera's LCD monitor or viewfinder or on a
with a frame rate lower than the computer.
recorded one when output to a
TV or video. You can play every
frame by using the slow motion
playback.
• Use a memory card formatted in your camera

(p.35).
Battery ~
c
C"
(D
en
:T
Batteries are not the right type. • Use only unused AA-size alkaline batteries or fully
o
charged Canon AA-size NiMH batteries. See ....o
Battery Handling (Basic Guide p. 1).
:i"
(Q
The batteries are cold. Battery • If shooting in a cold area, keep the batteries warm
performance deteriorates at low (by placing them in an inner pocket, etc.) until
temperatures. ready to use them.
Battery terminals are dirty. • Wipe them well with a dry cloth before use.
• Reinsert the batteries several times.
The batteries have not been • If batteries are rechargeable: Performance should
used for over a year. return to normal after several charging cycles.
Battery life exceeded. • Replace all 4 batteries with new ones.
127

TV monitor output
Direct print compatible printers
Camera and printer are • Make sure the camera and printer are connected properly
not properly connected. with the specified cable.
Printer is not turned on. • Turn on the printer.
Print connection method • Select [Auto] for [Print Method] under the iii (Set up)
is incorrect. menu (p. 32).
128

I List of Messages
The following messages may appear on the LCD monitor (or
viewfinder) during shooting or playback. Please refer to the Direct
Print User Guide for the messages that display during a printer
connection.
Busy•..
Image is being recorded to, or read from, memory card.
The playback mode is starting up.
Resetting all the camera and menu settings to default.
Memory card has experienced an anomaly.

Memory card full
Memory card is full of images and no more can be recorded or saved. Or no more
image settings can be recorded. Or no more sound memos and sound recorder can be
recorded.
~~mim!~~r;€)r!
The image could not be created because there is an image with the same name as
folder that the camera is attempting to create, or the highest possible file number has
already been reached. In the Set up Menu, set the File Numbering option to [Auto
Reset]. Save all the images you wish to retain onto a computer, then reformat the
memory card (p. 35). Please note that formatting will erase all the existing images and
other data.
<liaf':l~e~rneba~er;ies~
Battery charge is insufficient to operate the camera. Replace all 4 batteries immediately
with unused AA-size alkaline batteries or fully charged Canon AA-size NiMH batteries.
flolRlage.
No images recorded on memory card.
129

data size.
130

an
error message may appear if you press on the lens while it is moving or power up the
camera in a dusty or sandy environment. Power up the camera again and shoot or
r-
playback images. Take the camera to a service center if this message appears
frequently because there may be a problem with the lens. ..o.....
en"
an error. power on, 3:

CD
or play back. A problem exists if the error code reappears. Note the number and en
en
contact your Canon Customer Support Help Desk. If an error code displays directly S»
(Q
after taking a picture, the shot may not have been recorded. Check image in playback CD
mode. en
131

IAppendix
Battery Handling
The following icon and message will display.

C!I Change the batteries
The battery charge is low. If you plan to Battery charge is insufficient to operate the
use the camera for an extended period camera. Replace the battery immediately.
of time, replace the battery as soon as
possible.
• Use AA-size alkaline or Canon AA-size NiMH batteries (sold separately) only.
While it is possible to use AA-size nickel-cadmium batteries, performance is unreliable
and their use is not recommended.
• The operating time of the batteries you purchase may not be as long as the
batteries that came with the camera.
The performance of alkaline batteries may differ according to brand.
• If you are using the camera in cold areas or for a long time, we recommend using
Canon's AA-size NiMH Battery Kit (sold separately).
Camera operating time may shorten at low temperatures when alkaline batteries are
used. Also due to their specifications, alkaline batteries may expire faster than NiMH
batteries.
• Never mix new batteries together with batteries that have been used in other
devices.
The partially used batteries may leak.
• Be careful to load the batteries with their positive ( EB) and negative ( 8) ends
in the right direction.
• Never mix batteries of different types or from different manufacturers. All four
batteries should be identical.
• Before inserting the batteries, wipe the battery terminals well with a dry cloth.
Oil from one's skin or dirtiness may cause a considerable reduction in the number of
recordable images or reduce usage time.
• Battery performance deteriorates at low temperatures, and the battery icon C!J
may display more quickly.
If you are using the camera in cold areas and batteries are running down faster than
they should, you may be able to restore performance by placing batteries in an inner
pocket to warm them up prior to use.
132

• Be careful that you don't put the batteries into a pocket together with a metal key
chain or other metallic objects, as these objects may cause batteries to short-
circuit.
• If you do not plan to use the camera for a long time, remove the batteries from
the camera and store them in a safe place.
Batteries may leak and damage the camera if left installed during prolonged periods of
non-use.
Never use damaged batteries or batteries whose outer seal is completely or

partially missing or peeled off, as there is risk that such batteries may leak,
overheat, or burst.
Always check the seals on store-bought batteries before loading them, as some batteries
may come with defective seals. Do not use batteries with defective seals.
Never use batteries that look like this.
Batteries with all or part of the seal (electrical insulation sheath) peeled
off.
The positive electrode (plus terminal) is flat.
The negative terminal is correctly formed (protruding from the metal

base), but the seal does not extend up over the edge of the metal base.
Handling the Memory Card
. - - - - - - - Write Protect Tab
t the switch up. Slide the switch

down (you can
protect the images
»
"C
"C
and other data on (1)
the card) :::s
Q.
Writinlq/Erasiinq Possible ;<"
133

• Memory cards are high-precision electronic devices. Do not bend them, apply
force to them, or subject them to shocks or vibration.
• Do not attempt to disassemble or alter the memory card.
• Do not allow dirt, water or foreign objects to contact the terminals on the back of
the card. Do not touch the terminals with your hands or metal objects.
• Do not peel away the original label on the memory card or cover it with another
label or sticker.
• When writing on the memory card, do not use a pencil or ball-point pen. Only
use a soft point pen (e.g. felt-tip pen).
• Do not use or store memory cards in the following locations.
- Locations subject to dust or sand
- Locations subject to high humidity and high temperatures
• Since some or all of the data recorded on the memory card may be corrupted or
erased by electrical noise, static electricity or card/camera malfunction, making
a backup copy of important data is recommended.
• Please note that formatting (initializing) an memory card erases all data,
including protected images and other file types.
• You are recommended to use memory cards that have been formatted in your
camera.
- The card supplied with the camera may be used without further formatting.
- When the camera is malfunctioning, a corrupted memory card might be the cause.
Reformatting the memory card may solve the problem.
- When a non-Canon brand memory card is malfunctioning, reformatting it may solve
the problem.
- Memory cards formatted in other cameras, computers, or peripheral devices may not
operate correctly in this camera. When that happens, reformat the memory card with
this camera.
• If formatting in the camera does not work properly, turn the camera off and re-
insert the memory card. Then turn the camera back on and format again.
134

Replacing the Date Battery
If the LCD monitor (or viewfinder) displays the Date/Time menu when
you turn on the camera, this means that the date battery has run down
and the clock has stopped running. Please purchase a replacement
battery (lithium coin battery CR1220) and install it as follows.
The date battery is preinstalled at the factory and may

therefore expire earlier than its rated lifespan after the camera
has been purchased.
1 Turn off the power and open the battery cover

(Basic Guide p. 1).
Remove the AA-size batteries,

then pull out the battery holder
by hooking your fingernail under
the bottom of the battery holder
edge.
3 Remove the old date battery and ~Positive

place a new date battery into the ~ terminal
date battery holder with the
positive terminal (+) facing
,~(+)
upward. ®~~
------------------_._----------------------------------_._- »
4 Replace the date battery holder, replace the AA-size :g
batteries and close the battery cover. ~
I-Set the date and time -~h~~-;h~-D;-~Ti;~-~;~~i;-----~
displayed on the LCD monitor (or viewfinder) (Basic
Guide p. 4).
135

fE¥I The LCD monitor also displays the Date/Time menu the very
CMJ first time you turn on the camera. This is normal, and you don't
need to replace the date battery.
Using the Power Kits

(Sold Separately)
Using Rechargeable Batteries
Battery and Charger Kit CBK4-300
Included are the battery charger and four rechargeable AA-size NiMH
(nickel metal hydride) batteries. Charge the batteries as shown below.
'-------Charge Indicator
• Insert the batteries into the charger before plugging the charger
into a power outlet.
• Do not insert additional batteries into the charger once charging
begins.
The indicator blinks while charging, then remains lit when charging is
finished.
136

137

r5¥1elt takes approximately 4 hours 40 minutes with four for the
CjJ charger to fully recharge them (as determined by testing at
Canon facilities). Please do not charge batteries in areas
where the temperature is outside the range of 0 to 35 °C
(32 to 95 OF).
e Charging time varies according to ambient temperature and
to the batteries' initial charge state.
e The battery charger may emit noise while charging. This is
not a malfunction.
e You can also use Battery/Charger Kit CBK4-200.
138

Using a Compact Power Adapter Kit
(Sold Separately)
You should use the separately sold Compact Power Adapter
CA-PS700 when using the camera for long periods of continuous use
or for connecting to a computer or printer.
1 Connect the power

cord to the compact
power adapter first
and then plug the
other end into the
power outlet.
Plug in the power cord
firmly as far as it will go.
2 Open the terminal

cover and connect
the DC plug of the
compact power
adapter to the
camera's DC IN
terminal.
Always disconnect and
unplug the compact power adapter after use.
139

Using Conversion Lenses
(Sold Separately)
When attaching the Wide Converter WC-DC58A, Tele-converter
TC-DC58B, and Close-up Lens 500D (58 mm) (each sold separately)
you also need the Conversion Lens Adaptor LA-DC58E (included
with the separately sold Lens Adaptor/Hood Kit LAH-DC20).
Wide Converter WC-DC58A

Use this converter for taking wide-angle shots. The wide converter
changes the focal length of the camera body's lens by a factor of
approximately 0.75x (the thread diameter is 58 mm).
Tele-converter TC-DC58B
This lens is used for taking telephoto shots. The lens changes the
focal length of the camera body's lens by a factor of approximately
1.5x. (the thread diameter is 58 mm).
~ It is not possible to attach a lens hood or filter to the wide

LiJ converter or tele-converter.
140

Close-up Lens 500D (58 mm)
This lens makes macro shooting easy. You can take normal shots
28 to 50 cm (11 in. - 1.6 ft.) between the front of the lens and the
subject with wide-angle and 35 to 50 cm (1.1 - 1.6 ft.) with telephoto
in macro mode.
Shooting Area
Distance between the front of the lens and the subject Shooting area
276 x 207 mm
Wide 28 cm (11.0 in.)
(11 x8.1 in.)
34x26 mm
Tele 35cm (1.1 ft.)
(1.3 x 1.0 in.)
Lens Adapter/Hood Kit LAH-DC20

- Conversion Lens Adapter LA-DC58E
This is a lens adapter required for attaching the wide converter,
tele-converter and close-up lens (58 mm thread diameter).
- Lens Hood LH-DC40
We recommend attaching the lens hood to prevent light from
outside of the screen from entering the lens when shooting with
wide-angle and backlight without a flash.
Attaching a Lens/Lens Hood

1 Be sure that the camera is turned off.
Press the ring release
button and hold it down,
and turn the ring in the
direction of the arrow (CD).
When the • mark on the
camera and the • mark on
the ring are aligned, pull
off the ring (~).
141

3 Align the. mark on the conversion lens adapter with
the • mark on the camera, and turn the adapter in the
direction of the arrows as far as the • mark on the
camera.
Conversion Lens
Adaptor LA-DC58E
attachment
• To remove the conversion lens adapter (lens hood or

conversion lens), turn the adapter in the opposite direction with
holding down the ring release button.
4 Set the lens or lens hood on the adapter, and turn it in

the indicated direction to attach it securely.
Wide Converter
WC-DC58A attachment
142

Converter Settings
Set the camera appropriately after attaching the Wide Converter
WC-DC58A or the Tele-converter TC-DC588 (no setting is needed
for the 5000 Close-Up lens).
1 ICI (Rec.) Menu .. [Converter] • [Off]*/[WC-OC58A]/

[TC-OC58B].
• Select the attached converter.

* Default setting.
Using an Externally Mounted Flash

(Sold Separately)
High-Power Flash HF-DC1
This flash is used to supplement the camera's built-in flash when the
subject is too far away for proper illumination. Use the following
procedures to affix the camera and High-Power Flash to the
supporting bracket.
Please read the instructions accompanying the flash along with this
explanation.
Tripod Sockets
Bracket -----~
(Comes with the flash)
»
"'C
"'C
CD
::s
Co
><"
143

r:¥1. Before attaching the bracket to the flash, check that the
CMJ lithium battery (CR123A or DL123) is installed .
• To illuminate the subjects properly, install the flash so that it is
up against the side of the camera and parallel with the
camera's front panel .
• A tripod can be used even when the flash is attached.
Batteries
• Charge becomes Severely Limited
If the battery usage time has considerably diminished, wipe the
battery terminals well with a dry cloth. The terminals may be soiled
with oil from one's skin or other dirt.
• Usage in Cold Temperatures (Less than O°C/32°F)
Get a spare generic lithium battery (CR123A or DL123). You are
recommended to place the spare battery in your pocket to warm it
up before switching it for the battery in the flash.
• Non-Use over Extended Periods
Leaving batteries in the High-Power Flash could allow the battery
fluid to leak, damaging the product. Remove the batteries from the
High-Power Flash and store them in a cool, dry place.
144

Camera Care and Maintenance
If the camera, lenses, viewfinder or LCD monitor become dirty, use
the following cleaning methods.
Never use thinners, benzine, synthetic cleansers or water to

clean the camera. These substances may distort or damage
the equipment.
Camera Body
Gently wipe dirt off the camera body with a soft cloth or eyeglass lens
wiper.
Lens
First use a lens blower brush to remove dust and dirt, then remove
any remaining dirt by wiping the lens lightly with a soft cloth.
Viewfinder and LCD Monitor

Use a lens blower brush to remove dust and dirt. If necessary, gently
wipe with a soft cloth or an eyeglass lens wiper to remove stubborn
dirt.
145

Specifications
All data is based on Canon's standard testing methods. Subject to
change without notice.
PowerShot S3 IS
Camera Effective Pixels Approx. 6.0 million
Image Sensor 1/2.5 -inch type CCD
(Total number of pixels: Approx 6.2 million)
Lens 6.0 (W) - 72.0 (T) mm
(35mm film equivalent: 36 - 432 mm)
f/2.7 (W) - f/3.5 (T)
Digital Zoom Approx.4.0x
(Up to approx. 48x in combination with the optical zoom)
Viewfinder Color LCD viewfinder Picture coverage rate 100%
Dioptric Adjustment -5.5 - +1.5 m-\dpt.)
LCD Monitor 2.0 inch, low-temperature polycrystalline silicon
TFT (vari-angle type) color LCD (Approx. 115,000 pixels,
picture coverage 100%)
AF System TTL autofocus (continuous or single)
Focus lock and Manual focus are available
Focusing frame: 1-point AF (fixed to center or
FlexiZone AF)
Shooting Distance Normal AF: 50 cm (1.6 ft.) - infinity (W)/
(from tip of lens) 90 cm (3.0 ft.) - infinity (T)
Macro: 10 - 50 cm (3.9 in. -1.6 ft. (W))
Super Macro: 0 - 10 cm (0 - 3.9 in.) (Wonly)
Shutter Mechanical shutter + electronic shutter
Shutter Speeds 15 - 1/3200 sec.
• The shutter speed varies according to the shooting mode.
• Shutter speeds of 15 to 1.3 sec. are available in
Shutterpriority mode or Manual mode.
• Slow shutter speeds of 15 to 1.3 sec. or slower operate
with noise reduction.
Light Metering System Evaluative, Center-weighted average or Spot (Center or
AF-point)
(W): wide angle (T): telephoto
146

Exposure Compensation ± 2.0 stops in 1/3-stop increments Auto exposure
bracketing (AEB) and Safety Shift is available.
ISO Speed Auto*, High ISO Auto*, ISO 80/100/200/400/800 equivalent
* The camera automatically selects the optimal speed when
Auto or High ISO Auto is set.
White Balance TTL auto, Daylight, Cloudy, Tungsten, Fluorescent,
Fluorescent H, Flash or custom
Built-in Flash Auto*, on*, off
* Red-eye reduction is available.
FE lock, Slow synchro and 1st-curtain/2nd-curtain flash are
available.
Flash Range Normal: 50 em - 5.2 m(1.6 -17 ft.) (W)/
90 em - 4.0 m(3.0 -13 ft.) (T)
Macro: 30 - 50 em (12 in. -1.6 ft.) (W) (ISO speed =Auto) ~
Flash Exposure ± 2.0 stops in 1/3-stop increments

Compensation
Flash Output* 3 stops
* Can be set when flash exposure setting is [Off]
Shooting Modes Auto
Creative zone: Program, Shutter-speed priority, Aperture
priority, Manual, Custom
Image zone: Portrait, Landscape, Night scene, Sports,
Special Scene*, Stitch Assist, Movie
* Foliage, Snow, Beach, Fireworks, Color Swap,
Color Accent, Night Snapshot, Indoor
Continuous shooting Approx. 1.5 shots/sec. (Large/Fine mode)
Approx. 2.3 shots/sec. (High-speed continuous shooting,
Large/Fine mode)
Intervalometer Shooting interval: approx. 1- 60 min. (1-min. increments)
Number of shots: 2 - 100 shots (Maximum number of shots
varies according to memory card capacity.)
Self-timer Activates shutter after an approx. 10-sec.lapprox. 2- sec.
delay, Custom Timer
PC-controlled Shooting Available (USB connection only. Exclusive software »
program is included in the camera kit.) :g
Recording Media SD memory card/MultiMediaCard ~
Q.
(W): wide angle (T): telephoto ;c"
147

File Format Design rule for camera file system and DPOF compliant
Number of Recording Exif 2.2 (JPEG) *1
Pixels (Still Images) Sound Memo, Sound Recorder: WAVE (stereo)
(Movies) AVI (Image data: Motion JPEG; Audio data: WAVE (stereo))
Compression Super fine, Fine, Normal
Recording Pixels Large: 2816 x 2112 pixels
(Still Images) Medium 1: 2272 x 1704 pixels
Medium 2: 1600 x 1200 pixels
Small: 640 x 480 pixels
Wide: 2816 x 1584 pixels
Movie Recording Pixels/ 640 x 480 pixels (30 frames/sec.)
Frame Rate 640 x 480 pixels (15 frames/sec.)
320 x 240 pixels (60 frames/sec.)
Recording can continue until the memory card is full*
(Max. Clip Size at one time: 1GB)**
* Using super high-speed memory cards
(SDC-512MSH recommended).
** Even if the clip size has not reached 1GB, recording will
stop at the moment the clip length reaches 1 hour.
Depending on the volume and data writing speed of the
memory card, recording will stop before reaching 1 hour
or before the recorded data volume has reached 1 GB.
Audio Sampling frequency: 44.100/11.025/22.050 kHz
Quantization bit: 16 bit
Playback Modes Single (histogram displayable), Index (9 thumbnail images)
Magnified (approx. 10x max. in LCD monitor or viewfinder,
forward or reverse selection through magnified images
possible), Jump (it is possible to jump to every tenth or
hundredth image, to the first image of each shooting date,
to movies or to the first image in each folder. In index
playback mode, it displays 9 images at once.), Slide Show,
My Colors
Sound memos (up to 1 min. recording/playback)
Movie (editing/slow-motion playback possible)
Sound recorder (up to 2 hrs. of recording/playback of sound
only)
148

Custom Display Function Display location: LCD monitor (2), viewfinder (2)
Displayed information: shooting info*, grid lines*, histogram*
* You can enable/disable display of this information for
each of the display locations.
Direct Print PictBridge compliant, Canon Direct Print, and Bubble Jet
Direct compatible
My Camera settings Start-up image, start-up sound, operation sound,
self-timer sound, and shutter sound
Interface USB 2.0 Hi-Speed (mini-B), PTP [Picture Transfer Protocol]
AudioNideo output (NTSC or PAL selectable, stereo audio)
Power Source AA alkaline batteries (included in the camera kit)
AA NiMH batteries (NB4-300) (sold separately)
Compact Power Adapter (CA-PS700) (sold separately)
Operating Temperatures 0-40 °C (32 - 104 OF)
Operating Humidity 10-90%
Dimensions
113.4 x 78.0 x 75.5 mm (4.46 x 3.07 x 2.97 in.)
(excluding protrusions)
Weight (camera body only) Approx. 410 g (14.5 oz.)
*1 This digital camera supports Exif 2.2 (also called "Exif Print"). Exif Print is a
standard for enhancing the communication between digital cameras and
printers. By connecting to an Exif Print-compliant printer, the camera's image
data at the time of shooting is used and optimized, yielding extremely high
quality prints.
149

Battery Capacity
Number of Images Shot
LCD Monitor ON Playback Time
(Based on the Viewfinder ON
CIPA standard)
M Alkaline Batteries Approx. Approx. Approx.
(included with the camera) 110 images 110 images 13 hours
M NiMH Battery Approx. Approx. Approx.
(NB-3AH) (full charge) 550 images 570 images 15 hours
e The actual figures will vary according to the shooting conditions

and settings.
e Movie data is excluded.
e At low temperatures, the battery performance may diminish and the
low battery icon may appear very rapidly. In such a case, the
performance can be improved by warming the batteries in your
pocket before use.
Test Conditions
Shooting: Normal temperature (23°C ± 2 °C/73 of ± 3.6 OF), normal
relative humidity (500/0 ± 20%), alternating max. wide angle
and max. telephoto shots at 30 second intervals with the
flash fired once every two shots and the camera power
turned off after every tenth shot. Power is left off for a
sufficient amount of time*, then the power is turned back
on and the testing procedure is repeated.
eA Canon-brand memory card is used.
* Until the battery returns to normal temperature
Playback: Normal temperature (23°C ± 2 °C/73 of ± 3.6 OF), normal
relative humidity (50% ± 20 % ), continuous playback at 3
seconds per image.
GI See Battery Handling Precautions (p. 132).
150

Memory Cards and Estimated Capacities
Still Images [=:J: Card included with the camera
II (Large)
2816 x 2112 pixels
III (Medium 1)
2272 x 1704 pixels
Ii (Medium 2)
1600 x 1200 pixels
II (Small)
640 x 480 pixels
iii (Wide)
2816 x 1584 pixels
»
"C
"C
CD
::::s
Q.
;<-
151

Movies c::J: Card included with the camera
Recording Pixels/
Modes 16MB SOC-128M SOC-512MSH
Frame Rate
[Ij 640 x 480 pixels/
6 sec. 1 min. 4 sec. 4 min. 9 sec.
30 frames/sec.
640 x 480 pixels/
l!ii 15 frames/sec.
320 x 240 pixels/
fIJ 60 frames/sec.
320 x 240 pixels/
III 30 frames/sec.
20 sec. 3 min. 1sec. 11 min. 42 sec.
320 x 240 pixels/
tIJ 15 frames/sec.
* The durations shown on the table are the maximum recording lengths when
the audio sampling rate set to 44.1 OOkHz and shooting takes place
continuously.
Image Data Sizes (Estimated)

Still Images
Compression
Recording Pixels
!!I r:J !:J
II 2816 x 2112 pixels 2720 KB 1620 KB 780 KB
1m 2272 x 1704 pixels 2002 KB 1116 KB 556 KB
1m 1600 x 1200 pixels 1002 KB 558 KB 278 KB
II 640 x 480 pixels 249 KB 150 KB 84 KB
iii 2816 x 1584 pixels 2026 KB 1210 KB 585KB
152

Movies
Modes Recording Pixels Frame Rate File size
III 640 x 480 pixe1s 30 frames/sec. 1980 KB/sec.
III 640 x 480 pixels 15 frames/sec. 990 KB/sec.

fI) 320 x 240 pixels 30 frames/sec. 660 KB/sec.
g 320 x 240 pixels 15 frames/sec. 330 KB/sec.
III 320 x 240 pixels 60 frames/sec. 1320 KB/sec.
SD Memory Card (Sold Separately)

Interface Compatible with SD memory card standards
Dimensions 32.0 x 24.0 x 2.1 mm (1.3 x 0.9 x 0.1 in.)
Weight Approx. 2 g (0.07 oz.)
MultiMediaCard
Interface Compatible with MultiMediaCard standards
Weight Approx. 1.5 g (0.05 oz.)
Compact Power Adapter CA-PS700

(Sold Separately)
Rated Input AC 100 - 240 V (50 / 60 Hz)
Rated Output DC 7.4 V / 2.0 A
Operating
Temperatures 0 - 40°C (32 -104 OF)
Dimensions 112.0 x 29.0 x 45.0 mm (4.4 x 1.1 x 1.8 in.) (camera body only)
Weight Approx. 185 g (6.5 oz.) »
------------------------:g
CD
::J
Q.
:;<"
153

Battery Charger CB-5AH/CB-5AHE
(Sold Separately)
(Included with the separately sold Battery and Charger Kit CBK4-300)
Rated Input AC 100 - 240 V (50 160 Hz)

16 VA (100 V) - 21 VA (240 V)
Rated Output 565 mA*1, 1275 mA*2
Charging Time Approx. 4 hours 40 min.*1, Approx. 2 hours*2
Operating
0- 35 °C (32 - 95 OF)
Temperatures
*1 When using 4 NiMH NB-3AH batteries.
*2 When using 2 NiMH NB-3AH batteries, one at each end of the charger.
Wide Converter WC-DC58A (Sold Separately)

Magnification Approx.0.75
Focal Length 27 mm (35mm film equivalent)
Lens composition 3 elements in 3 groups
Shooting Distance
28 cm - infinity (11 in. - infinity)
(from tip of lens)
Thread Diameter 58 mm standard filter thread
(Conversion Lens Adapter LA-DC58E is required for mounting to
PowerShot 5315)
Dimensions Diameter: 79.0 mm (3.1 in.)
Length: 39.3 mm (1.5 in.)
154

Tele-converter TC-DC58B (Sold Separately)
Magnification Approx.1.5
Focal Length 648 mm (35mm film equivalent)
Lens composition 5 elements in 3 groups
Shooting Distance
2.0 m(6.6 ft.) - infinity
(from tip of lens)
Thread Diameter 58 mm standard filter thread (Conversion Lens Adapter
LA-DC58E is required for mounting to PowerShot S3 IS)
NiMH Battery NB-3AH (Sold Separately)

(Included with the separately sold NiMH NB4-300 or the Battery!
Charger Kit CBK4-300)
Type AA-size rechargeable nickel hydride battery
Nominal Voltage DC 1.2V
Typical Capacity 2500 mAh (Lowest: 2300 mAh)
Cycle Life Approx. 300 (estimated)
Temperatures 0- 40°C (32 - 104 OF)
Conversion Lens Adapter LA-DC58E

(Included with the separately sold Lens Adapter/Hood Set LAH-DC20)

Dimensions Diameter: 63.0 mm (2.5 in.) ~
_ _ _ _ _ _ _Le_n_gt_h:_4_3._1_m_m_(_1.7_i_n._) -g
Weight Approx. 19 g (0.67 oz.) &.
;<"
155

Lens Hood LH-DC40
(Included with the separately sold Lens Adapter/Hood Set LAH-DC20)

Close-up Lens 500D 58 mm (Sold Separately)

Shooting Distance 28 - 50 em (11 in. - 1.6 ft.) (W)
(from tip of lens) 35 - 50 em (1.1 -1.6 ft.)(T)
Thread Diameter 58 mm standard filter thread (Conversion Lens Adapter
LA-DC58E is required for mounting to PowerShot S3 IS)
Dimensions Diameter: 60 mm (2.4 in.)
156

IINDEX
A E
Adjusting the Exposure Effects (Playback) 99
Compensation 75 Erasing
AE Lock 70 Erasing All Images 110
AEB Mode 76 Erasing All Images 110
AF Frame (EEl) 63
F
AF Lock 64
AF Mode 67 FE Lock 72
AF-assist Beam . . . . . . . . 12, 28 File Number 21, 32, 90
Aperture Value 59 Flash 12
Audio 50 Flash Adjustment 82
Auto Power Down 23,31 Flash Sync 28, 83
Auto Rotate 32,87 Focus 64
Automated Playback Focus Bracketing 68
(Slide Shows) 105 Focus Lock 64
Folder 88
C Format 31,35
Camera Care 145 Frame Rates 48
Color Accent Mode . . . . . . . . 53 FUNC 15
Color Swap Mode . . . . . . . . . 54
Compression 36
G
Continuous Shooting 42 Grid Line 20, 29
Creative Zone .. . . . . . . . . . . 57 H
D Histograms 19
DatelTime 31
DCF 22,148 Intervalometer 29,84
Detailed Display 22 ISO Speed 69
DIGITAL Terminal 12
Digital Zoom 29,41 .J
DISP 15 Jumping (!D) 94
Display Off 31
DPOF 111
Print Settings 111
Transfer Settings 114
157

L p
Language 32 Panoramic Image 51
LCD Brightness 31 Playback
LCD Monitor 14 Viewing Images on a
List of Messages 129 TV set 116
Playback Vol 31
M Power Saving 23,31
Magnified Images (~) 92 Printing
Manual Aperture 60 Print Order 111
Manual Focus (MF) 66 Print/Share (~IN' ) 15
Memory Card Program AE 57
Format 35 Protecting 109
MENU 15
Menu R
Menu Item 28 Recording Pixels . . . . . . . . . . 36
My Camera Menu 33 Recording Volume 51
Play Menu 30 Red-eye Reduction . . . . . 12, 28
Print Menu 30 ResetAII 34
Rec. Menu 28 Review 29
Set up Menu 31 Using a TV 116
Metering Mode 28, 73 Rotating 98
MF 66
MF-Point Zoom 28,66
S
Mic Level 50 Safety Shift .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Microphone 12 Sampling Rate 51
Movie Save Settings 86
Shooting 46 SD memory cards . . . . . . . . . . 1
Mute 31 Self-Timer ( ~ ). . . . . . . . . 28, 43
My Camera Menu 33 Selftimer Sound 33
My Camera Settings 117 Set Shortcut button 29,62
My Colors 80, 100 Shooting Mode 16
Shortcut Button (.~). . . . . . . . 61
N Shutter Button . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Night Display 19 Shutter Sound 31,33
Shutter Speed-priority
o AE Mode (Tv) . . . . . . . . . 58
Omni Selector 15 Shutter Speed 59
Operation Sound 31, 33 Slide Shows 105
Overexposure Warning 23 Slow Synchro 28,38
158

Smooth Continuous Shooting 42
Sound Memos (t) . . . . 102
Sound Mode . . . . . 50
Sound Recorder 103
Speaker 14
Start-up Image 33
Start-up Sound 31, 33
Stitch Assist 51
Super Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
T
Tally Lamp 12
Telephoto (ctJ) 14,41,92
Terminal Cover . . . . . . . . . .. 14
Time Zone 24
V
Video Output Signal 116
Video System 32
Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Volume 31
W
White Balance 77
Wind Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
World Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Z
Zoom 14,41,92
159

MEMO
160

MEMO
161

MEMO
162

MEMO
163

MEMO
164

Trademark Acknowledgments
• Macintosh, Mac as
and QuickTime are trademarks of Apple
Computer Inc., registered in the United States and/or other countries.
• Microsoft® and Windows® are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries.
• SD is a trademark.
• Other names and products not mentioned above may be registered
trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies.
Copyright © 2006 Canon Inc. All rights reserved.
165

FCC Notice
(Digital Camera, Model PC1192)
Fe ~:~~~J~~~~~J~
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions;
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for Class B digital devices, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radiolTV technician for help.
The cable with the ferrite core provided with the digital camera must be
used with this equipment in·order to comply with Class B limits in Subpart
B of Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless
otherwise specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications
should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the
equipment.
Canon U.S.A. Inc.,
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.
Tel No. (516) 328-5600
Canadian Radio Interference Regulations

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Reglementation canadienne sur les interferences radio
Cet appareil numerique de la c1asse Best conforme la norme a
- NMB-003 du Canada.
166

IFunctions Available in Each Shooting Mode
The chart below is a reference for the settings available for various
shooting conditions. The settings selected in each shooting mode are
saved after you finish shooting.
You can shoot with the settings saved in the C mode (p. 86).
----..---------..-
"tA
tmID SeN ~, cQ
Large II
Recording Pixels
Medium 1 III
(Still Image) Medium 2 II
p.36
Small II
Wide 1m
Super Fine m
Compression
p.36
Fine
Normal
•
.II
Movie Recording Pixels/Frame Rate(1) p. 48
Auto ~A
Flash
Basicp.11 On ~ l::.
Off ~ 0 0 l::.
Red-Eye Reduction Basic p. 12 @
Slow Synchro p. 38 _(4) .(5) l::.

(2) (3)
Flash Adjust p. 82 .(6) .(6) .(6) .(6) -
(7)
Flash firing p. 83
1st-curtain
2nd-curtain
• .(2) .(3)
•
Single 0
Standard Continuous C)I _
Mode p. 42 ==!!J
High-speed
Drive Mode continuous ~-
pp. 42, 43 shooting p. 43
1a-sec. self-timer (10
p.42
2-sec. self-timer t"2
Custom Timer tc
Intervalometer p. 84
167

Q!IID seN : ~ cQ -" P Tv Av M
AF Frame p. 63
Center Point
Manual
• • • ••
AF Lock p. 65
Manual Focus p. 66
MF-Point Zoom p. 66
AF-assist Beam p. 28
Macro Basic p. 12
Digital Zoom p. 41
Safety Shift p. 60
Exposure Compensation p. 75
ISO Speed p. 69
White Balance(16) p. 77
Evaluative 00· •
Center-Weighted
[J
Metering Method Average Metering
p.73 Spot [e] -
r-------'----+---+--+---;--+--
Center
AF Point
AE Lock/FE Lock pp. 70, 72
AEB p. 76
*
Bracket
Focus-BKT p. 68
My Color p. 80
Focus Settings
p.67
Save Original p. 56
Reverse Disp. p. 29
Custom Display pp. 17,29
Grid Lines pp. 17,29
Histogram pp. 17,29
Auto Rotate p. 87
0: Setting available (.: Default setting) .6: Setting can only be selected for the first image.
(.: Default setting) -: Setting selection is not possible.
• \:\1~0~~~\tSit!, Setting is remembered even when the camera power is shut off.
• With the exception of the [Time Zone], [Datemme], [Language], and [Video System]
settings, all the other menu settings and changes made with the camera buttons can be
reset to the default values in a single operation (p. 34).
168

(1 )The following are the recording pixels and frame rates for -" (Movie).
640 x 480 pixels x 30 frames/sec.
Movie Recording Pixels/Frame Rate 320 x 240 pixels x 60 frames/sec.
(2) This cannot be set in ; ; mode.
(3) This cannot be set in ~ mode.
(4) [On] only in Night Scene mode ([Off] cannot be set).
(5) [Off] cannot be set. Also [On] cannot be set in the" or ~ modes.
(6) [Off] cannot be set.
(7) This cannot be set in Flt or I! modes.
(8) Continuous shooting is the default setting in ~.
(9) This cannot be set in :.. or ~ modes.
(10)Only Flt and I! can be set.
(11) Exposure shift can be set after AE lock.
(12)Only switching between ~ and ~ is available.
(13)Automatically set by the camera.
(14) ~ cannot be set.
(15) ~ or ~ cannot be set.
(16)This cannot be set when My Colors is set to Sepia or BIW.
(17) White balance data cannot be read in Manual.
(18) ~ cannot be set in ~ or -" mode.
(19)FE lock cannot be selected in the -" modes.
(20) Custom Color cannot be set.
(21 )This can be set, but cannot be displayed.
169

Canon
CDI-E215-02A 0406CH55 © 2006 CANON INC. PRINTED IN JAPAN

ENGLISH
11III11111111111111111111111111111
CDI-E233
Canon
Software Starter Guide

(For the Canon Digital Camera Solution Disk Version 28)
You must install the software bundled on the Canon

Digital Camera Solution Disk before connecting the
camera to the computer.
• This guide explains how to install the software programs and

briefly introduces their functions and operating procedures.
• Please read the software license agreement in this guide before
using the software. By using the software, you agree to be
bound by the terms of the agreement.
~
DPOF

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The precautions noted within this guide are intended to instruct you in the safe and correct use of
the products and to prevent injuries or damage to yourself, other persons and property. Please
read and ensure that you understand them before proceeding to other sections of the guide.
Lh Warnings This symbol indicates topics that could lead to death or serious injury if
ignored or handled incorrectly.
LhWarnings
• Do not play the supplied CD-ROM(s) in any CD player that does not support data CD-
ROMs. Playing the CD-ROM(s) in an audio CD player (music player) could damage the
speakers. It is also possible to suffer from hearing loss from listening with headphones to
the loud sounds of a CD-ROM played on a music CD player.
Trademark Acknowledgments
• ArcSoft, the ArcSoft logo and ArcSoft PhotoStudio are trademarks or registered trademarks of
ArcSoft, Inc.
• Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation.
• Macintosh, Mac as
and QuickTime are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc., registered in the
United States and other countries.
• Microsoft® and Windows® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Other names and products not mentioned above may be registered trademarks or trademarks of
their respective companies.
Copyright © 2006 Canon Inc. All rights reserved.

READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING
Canon Software license Agreement
IMPORTANT - READ CAREFULLY BEFORE INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE! This document is a legal
agreement (" Agreement") between you and Canon Inc. ("Canon ") and governing your use of this
software, and online manual or other electronic documentation, and sound data and image data,
if any (the "Software"). BY INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE
TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT,
PROMPTLY STOP THE INSTALLATION P.ROCESS.
1. GRANT OF LICENSE
(1) Canon grants you a non-exclusive license to use (" use" shall mean storing, loading, installing,
executing, or displaying) the Software on your computers solely for use with Canon product. You may
allow other users of Canon's product to use the Software, provided that you shall impose on them on
the assurance that such users shall abide by the terms of this Agreement and shall be subject to
restrictions and obligations hereunder.
(2) With respect to the sound data and image data of the Software which is instructed to be used as
installed in a Canon's digital still camera or digital video camcorder product (" Product") under the
documentation for such Product, Canon grants you a non-exclusive license to install to and use them as
installed in such Product.
(3) You may make one copy of the Software solely for back-up purpose, provided that you shall reproduce
the copyright notice in the Software, on a medium of such back-up copy; provided, however, that you
may not make any back-up copy when the Software is provided to you as stored in a medium and you
use the Software as installed in permanent storage unit (e.g., hard disk drive) of a computer. Any other
copying of the Software is a violation of this Agreement.
2. RESTRICTIONS
You shall not use or copy the Software except as expressly granted or permitted herein, and shall not assign,
sublicense, sell, rent, lease, loan, conveyor transfer to any third party the Software, and you also shall not
have any third party to do so. In addition, you shall not alter, translate, modify, convert to any other
programming languages, disassemble, decompile or otherwise reverse engineer the Software and you also
shall not have any third party to do so. You shall not modify, remove or delete any copyright notices
appearing on the Software or on a medium, if any, on which the Software is delivered.
3. OWNERSHIP
Canon and its licensor retain in all respects the title, ownership and intellectual property rights in and to
the Software. Except as expressly provided herein, no license or right, express or implied, is hereby
conveyed or granted by Canon to you for any intellectual property of Canon.
4. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS
You agree to comply with all export laws and regulations of the country involved, and not to export or
re-export, directly or indirectly, the Software in violation of any such laws and regulations, or without all
necessary approvals.
5. SUPPORT AND UPDATE
Canon, Canon's subsidiaries and affiliates, their distributors and dealers are not responsible for
maintaining the Software and helping you to use the Software, or providing you with any updates, bug-
fixes or support for the Software hereunder.
6. LIMITED WARRANTY AND DISCLAIMER
LIMITED WARRANTY. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR
CONDITION OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF DESIGN, QUALITY,
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. ALSO, THERE IS NO
WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF TITLE, QUIET ENJOYMENT, QUIET POSSESSION,
CORRESPONDENCE TO DESCRIPTION OR OF NONINFRINGEMENT WITH RESPECT TO THE
SOFTWARE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE IS
WITH YOU. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU (AND NOT CANON, CANON'S
SUBSIDIARIES AND AFFILIATES, THEIR DISTRIBUTORS AND DEALERS) ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST
OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME STATES OR LEGAL
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE
EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS
AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE OR
JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION.
Canon, Canon's subsidiaries and affiliates, their distributors and dealers do not warrant that the
functions contained in the Software will meet your requirements or that the operation of the Software
will be uninterrupted or error free.

However, if you are provided with the Software as stored in a medium, Canon warrants the medium to
be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of ninety (90) days
from the date of you obtained the same as evidenced by a receipt or otherwise.
CUSTOMER REMEDIES. Canon, Canon's subsidiaries and affiliates, their distributors and dealers' entire
liability and your exclusive remedy shall be the replacement of the medium not meeting the LIMITED
WARRANTY. The LIMITED WARRANTY does not apply if failure of the medium has resulted from
accident, abuse or misapplication of the Software and shall not extend to anyone other than you.
NO LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL CANON, CANON'S SUBSIDIARIES AND
AFFILIATES, THEIR DISTRIBUTORS AND DEALERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OR DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER (WHETHER KNOWN, FORESEEABLE OR OTHERWISE), INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION, ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, OR
OTHER DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF CONFIDENTIAL OR OTHER BUSINESS INFORMATION, OR
OTHER COMPENSATORY, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES) ARISING OUT OF OR IN
ANY WAY RELATED TO THE SOFTWARE, USE THEREOF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE
EVEN IF CANON, CANON'S SUBSIDIARIES OR AFFILIATES, THEIR DISTRIBUTORS OR DEALERS HAVE
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES OR LEGAL JURISDlalONS
DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH RESULTING FROM NEGLIGENCE
ON THE PART OF SELLER, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
DISCLAIMER OF INDEMNITY. CANON, ITS LICENSOR, CANON'S SUBSIDIARIES AND AFFILIATES, THEIR
DISTRIBUTORS AND DEALERS SHALL ASSUME NO OBLIGATION TO INDEMNIFY YOU AGAINST ANY
CLAIM OR SUIT BROUGHT BY A THIRD PARTY ALLEGING THAT THE SOFTWARE OR USE THEREOF
INFRINGES ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY OF SUCH THIRD PARTY.
7. TERM
This Agreement is effective upon your acceptance hereof by installing the Software and remains in
effect until terminated. You may terminate this Agreement by destroying the Software including any
and all copies thereof. This Agreement shall also terminate if you fail to comply with any terms of this
Agreement. In the event that this Agreement terminates for your failure to comply with this
Agreement, in addition to Canon enforcing its respective legal rights, you must promptly destroy the
Software including any and all copies thereof. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Sections 3, 5 through 7
and 9 through 11 shall survive any termination hereof.
8. U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE
The Software is a "commercial item," as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct 1995), consisting
of "commercial computer software" and "commercial computer software documentation," as such
terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept 1995). Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R.
227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all U.S. Government End Users shall acquire the Software
with only those rights set forth herein. Manufacturer is Canon Inc./30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-
ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan.
9. SEVERABILITY
In the event that any provision of this Agreement is declared or found to be illegal by any court or tribunal
of competent jurisdiction, such provision shall be null and void with respect to the jurisdiction of that
court or tribunal and all the remaining provisions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect.
10.GOVERNING LAW
The terms and conditions of this Agreement, the performance hereunder and the interpretation hereof
shall in all respects be governed and construed in accordance with the laws of Japan.
11.ACKNOWLEDGMENT
BY INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT, UNDERSTOOD
IT, AND AGREED THAT THIS AGREEMENT IS THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE STATEMENT OF
AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND CANON CONCERNING THE SUBJECT MAnER HEREOF AND
SUPERSEDES ALL PROPOSALS OR PRIOR AGREEMENTS, VERBAL OR WRlnEN, AND ANY OTHER
COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN YOU AND CANON RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MAnER HEREOF. NO
AMENDMENT TO THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE EFFECTIVE UNLESS SIGNED BY A DULY AUTHORIZED
REPRESENTATIVE OF CANON.

Table of contents
Read This First 3
It's so Simple! Make Prints Right at Home Like a Pro 4
Unbounded Possibilities with Entertaining Software 6
System Requirements 8
Programs and Compatible Operating Systems 9
Before You Connect the Camera to the Computer 10
Using the Software on the Windows Platform

- Preparations 11
Installing the Software and USB Driver 11

- The Basics 16
Downloading Images to the Computer 16
Printing Images 21

- Advanced Techniques 24
The ZoomBrowser EX Windows 24
ZoomBrowser EX Features 30
Replaying Movies 33
Editing Movies 34
Operating the Shutter Remotely 35
Merging Panoramic Images - PhotoStitch 38
Enjoy Customizing Your Camera with the My Camera Settings 39
Using the Software on the Macintosh Platform

- Preparations 44
Installing the Software 44

- The Basics 46
Downloading Images to the Computer 46
Printing Images 50

21 Table of contents
- Advanced Techniques 52
The ImageBrowser Windows ~ 52
ImageBrowser Features 58
Replaying Movies 61
Editing Movies 62
Operating the Shutter Remotely 63
Merging Panoramic Images - PhotoStitch 66
Enjoy Customizing Your Camera with the My Camera Settings 67
Appendices 72
ArcSoft PhotoStudio 72
Uninstalling the Software 74
Memory Card Folder Structure 77
Troubleshooting 78
Information about Your Camera 87
Non-Supported Programs and Features 87
Index 88
Using the PDF Manuals

The following PDF-format manuals (hereafter PDF manuals) are provided to
explain the features and procedures for using ZoomBrowser EX and
ImageBrowser.
eZoomBrowser EX Software User Guide (Windows)
elmageBrowser Software User Guide (Macintosh)
Viewing PDF Manuals

Viewing Manuals Downloaded from a Website
These PDF-format manuals are available on the Canon website. Use your
browser program to download these manuals from the following URL:
http://web.canon.jp/lmaging/information-e.html

This chapter explains what you can accomplish using the camera with the software contained
on the Canon Digital Camera Solution Disk.
It also lists the computer system configurations required to use the software.
About this Guide

• The explanations in this guide are based on Windows XP and Mac as x v1 0.3. If you are
using another version of these operating systems, the actual screen contents and
procedures may vary slightly from those shown.
• The following terms are used in this guide.
Mac as x
is used for Mac as x
(v1 0.2-v1 0.4)
Memory card is used for CF cards, SD cards, MultiMediaCards and PC cards.
Method for Downloading to a Computer without Additional Software

Your camera uses a standard image transfer protocol called Picture Transfer Protocol (PTP).
With PTP and Windows XP or MaC as x,
you can download images without having to install
additional software. However, there are some inconveniences and limitations to this
downloading method. See the For Windows® XP and Mac as xUsers leaflet for details.

41 Read Th is Fi rst
It's SO Simplel Make Prints Right at Home

Like a Pro
~-- Shoot the images - - - -...
See your Camera User Guide for shooting instructions.
Install the software on the

computer
Windows (p. 11)

Macintosh (p. 44)
Just install the software once at the beginning.

I5
Connect the camera to the computer
Precautions for
Connecting the
Camera to the
Computer (p. 10)
See your Camera User Guide for connecting instructions.
Download images to the computer
Windows (p. 16)

Macintosh (p. 46)
Print the images
Windows (p. 21)

Macintosh (p. 50)

61 Read This First
Unbounded Possibilities with Entertaining

Software
Print a Variety of Layouts
Print with the diverse layouts available in ZoomBrowser EX (Windows) and ImageBrowser
(Macintosh). The examples shown are from ZoomBrowser EX (Windows).
With One Photo per Page Print, Confirm all your images in one glance
printing images is also easy. with index (contact sheet) printing.
Stitch a Panorama Together

Create a panoramic image from a series of images with PhotoStitch.

Send an Image as an E-mail Attachment
Attach an image to an e-mail message by starting your mail software from within
ZoomBrowser EX (Windows) or ImageBrowser (Macintosh).
-----------
Operate the Camera Shutter from the Computer
You can use ZoomBrowser EX (Windows) or ImageBrowser (Macintosh) to operate the camera
shutter from the computer to shoot images (Remote Shooting). The recorded images are
downloaded directly to the computer.
The shutter is operated from the computer.
Edit a Movie
You can edit movies, linking movies and stills that have been downloaded to the computer,
adding text, such as titles, adding background music or applying various special effects.
Extract Stills from Movies

You can extract a still from the displayed movie and save it as a new image file. You can also
specify a range of frames and extract multiple stills.

81 Read This First
System Requirements
Please install the software on a computer meeting the following minimum requirements.
Windows .
Windows 98 Second Edition (SE)
Windows Me
Windows 2000 Service Pack 4
Windows XP (including Service Pack 1 and Service Pack 2)
The above as should be pre-installed on computers with built-in USB

ports.
Pentium 500 MHz or higher processor
Windows 98 SE/Windows Me: 128 MB or more

Windows 2000/Windows XP: 256 MB or more
USB
• Canon Utilities
- ZoomBrowser EX: 200 MB or more
- PhotoStitch: 40 MB or more
• Canon Camera TWAIN Driver: 25 MB or more
·Canon Camera WIA Driver: 25 MB or more
• ArcSoft PhotoStudio: 50 MB or more
1,024 x 768 pixels/High Color (16 bit) or better
Macintosh . ,"
Mac as X (v1 0.2-v1 0.4)
The above as should be pre-installed on computers with built-in USB
ports.
PowerPC G3/G4/G5
256 MB or more
USB
• Canon Utilities
- ImageBrowser: 200 MB or more
- PhotoStitch: 40 MB or more
• ArcSoft PhotoStudio: 50 MB or more
1,024 x 768 pixels/32,OOO Colors or better

Programs and Compatible Operating Systems
The CD-ROM labeled "Canon Digital Camera Solution Disk" is provided with all models. It
contains the following programs.
Windows Programs
~
Windows Windows Windows Windows
Major Functions
Program 98 Me 2000 XP
ZoomBrowser EX
•
.*3
• • Downloading, displaying,
organizing and editing images
TWAIN Driver
WIA Driver
-
.*3
- •
•- - *4 Driver for Canon brand cameras (for
Windows 98, Windows 2000)
_*4 Driver (Windows Me)
PhotoStitch*1
ArcSoft PhotoStudio*1 *2 •
.*3
• • •• •• Merging images to make panoramas

Advanced image editing
* 1 Can be started from within ZoomBrowser EX.

*2 Image editing program manufactured by ArcSoft, Inc.
*3 Compatible with Windows 98 SE only.
*4 Driver not required because Windows XP supports PTP.
Macintosh Programs
~
Program
Mac as X Major Functions
ImageBrowser
PhotoStitch*1 •• Downloading, displaying, organizing and editing images
Merging images to make panoramas
ArcSoft PhotoStudio*1 *2
•
* 1 Can be started from within ImageBrowser.
Advanced image editing
*2 Image editing program manufactured by ArcSoft, Inc.

10 I Read This First
Before You Connect the Camera to the Computer
Precautions for Connecting the Camera to the Computer

• The connection may not operate correctly if you attach the camera to the computer with an
interface cable via a USB hub.
• The connection may not operate correctly if you are using other USB devices, excluding USB
mice or keyboards, at the same time as the camera. If this occurs, disconnect the other
devices from the computer and try reconnecting the camera.
• Do not connect two or more cameras at the same time to the same computer. The
con nections may not operate correctly.
• Never allow the computer to go into standby (sleep) mode while a camera is connected via
the USB interface cable. If it does happen, never disconnect the interface cable. Try to awaken
the computer with the camera in the connected state. Some computers will not awaken
properly if you disconnect the camera while they are in standby (sleep) mode. Please refer to
your computer manual for instructions regarding the standby (sleep) mode.
• You are recommended to power the camera from a household power source
(AC adapter) when connecting to a computer (if available for your camera
model). Ensure that you use fully charged batteries if you will not be using a
household power source.
• See the Camera User Guide for procedures connecting the camera to the
computer.

This chapter explains the basic procedures for installing the software and connecting the
camera to a computer. Read this material before you connect the camera to the computer.
Installing the Software and USB Driver

Start by installing the software from the Canon Digital Camera Solution Disk.
See ArcSoft PhotoStudio (p. 72) for details on how to install ArcSoft
PhotoStudio.
Ilems 10 'Iegare
- Your camera and computer
- Canon Digital Camera Solution Disk
-Interface cable supplied with the camera
Installation Proeedures
1 Confirm that the camera is NOT connected to
the computer.
If it is, disconnect the cable. The software cannot
be properly installed if the camera is connected to
the computer at the start.
2 Close any programs that are running.

121 Using the Software on the Windows Platform - Preparations
3 Place the Canon Digital Camera Solution Disk in the
computer's CD-ROM drive.
If the installer panel does not appear automatically, use the
following procedures.
How to Display the Installer Panel

Use the following procedures to display the installer panel if it does not appear
automatically.
WindowsXP
1. Select [My Computer] from the [Start] menu.
2. Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select [Open].
3. Double-click the [SETUP.EXE] icon.

Windows 2000, Windows Me, Windows 98 SE
1. Double-click the [My Computer] icon on the desktop.
2. Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select [Open].
3. Double-click the [SETUP.EXE] icon.

Some computers may not display the [.EXE] file name extension as shown above.
4 Click the Digital Camera Software [Easy

Installation] button. DIGITAL CAMERA
s·o·i~tion·D·isk··"·················"···
To individually select the software to install,
click [Custom Installation].
Installer Panel
Follow any instructions to restart your computer, if they appear. If the

following window appears, continue with the installation.

5 If other software is running, close each
program before clicking [OK].
6 Review the installation settings and

click [Install].
The items displayed here differ according to-..-..p ......jj-
the software installed.
7 Click [Yes] if you agree to all of the

terms of the software license
agreement.
The installation will start.
Follow the onscreen instructions to

proceed.

141 Using the Software on the Windows Platform - Preparations
8 When the installation is over, select
[Restart computer immediately
(Recommended)] and click [Restart]. Installation of the software has been completed.
At this stage, do NOT remove the Solution !ElRestart computer immediately (Recommended)
Disk from the CD-ROM drive yet.
If there is no need to restart the computer, the [Finish] screen will display. Click [Finish],
remove the Solution Disk from the CD-ROM drive and proceed to Step 10.
9 Remove the disk from the CD-ROM drive when your

normal desktop screen appears after restarting.
This concludes the software installation.
Continue by connecting the camera to the computer so
that the USB driver can be utilized.
See Uninstalling the Software (p. 74) to delete the installed programs.
10 Attach the camera to the computer with the

interface cable and set the camera to the
correct mode for connecting.

Procedures for attaching the camera to the computer and placing the
camera in the correct mode for connecting vary between camera models.
See the Camera User Guide.
If the Digital Signature Not Found window

appears, click [Yes].
The USB driver will automatically finish installing onto the computer when you attach the
camera and open a connection.
Dialogs similar to the following will appear during this process (first time the camera is
connected to a computer only).
WindowsXP
The dialog on the right will appear after a
few moments.
Windows 2000/Windows Me/Windows 98 SE

Restart the computer according to the instructions if you are prompted to do so by a
message.
A dialog allowing you to set the default settings will display after installation. See Using
the Software on the Windows Platform - The Basics (p. 16) for the subsequent
proced ures.
• See USB driver installation not proceeding well in the Troubleshooting

section (p. 78) if you are having problems installing the USB driver.
• See Uninstalling the USB Driver (p. 75) to delete the USB driver installed
with these procedures.
• See If You Were Using ZoomBrowser EX Version 2 or 3 (p. 85) if you
were previously using either version.
This concludes the software and USB driver installation and the procedures for connecting the
camera to the computer.
You may now download camera images to the computer (p. 16).

This chapter explains the procedures for using ZoomBrowser EX to download the camera's
images to the computer and print them.
Read this chapter after completing the preparations in the Using the Software on the Windows
Platform - Preparations section.
Downloading Images to the Computer

Begin by downloading the images to your computer. The downloading procedure is slightly
different according to whether you are using a camera to computer connection (see below) or
a memory card reader (p. 19).
Camera to Computer Connedion

, Attach the supplied interface cable to the computer's USB port and the camera's
DIGITAL Terminal. Prepare the camera for communication with the computer.
~ Procedures for attaching the camera to the computer and placing it in

LMJ the correct mode for connecting vary between camera models. See the
Camera User Guide.
The Camera Control Window will appear.
Camera Control Window ------~

First Time Camera is Connected to a Computer
Set the following settings the first time you connect the camera to the computer. These
procedures are not required from the second connection onward.
Select [Canon CameraWindow] when a

dialog (Events dialog) similar to that on
the right displays and click [OK].
Your camera model name or [Canon

Camera] will appear here.
--fillliill
Different programs may display
according to your computer setup.

Download the images using the camera or
the computer. By default, the downloaded
images are saved into the [My Pictures]
folder.
Press the camera's button
Placing a check mark here causes this

window to automatically open when the
camera and computer are connected.
You can adjust the settings, such as the type - . . . . .

of image downloaded and the destination
folder, by clicking [Preferences].

181 Using the Software on the Windows Platform - The Basics
Using the Camera to Download Images (Direct Transfer Function)
-If the conditions are right for the Direct Transfer function, the Direct
Transfer settings menu will appear in the LCD monitor. In addition, the
~¢v (Print/Share) button will light if your camera is equipped with one.
- See the Camera User Guide for instructions regarding Direct Transfer
settings and procedures.
Set the Direct Transfer settings on the

camera and press the ~¢v (Print/Share)
button or the SET button.
Using the Computer to Download Images

Click [Starts to download images].
- By default, all the images that have yet to be downloaded will download.
-To download images that have had their transfer settings set with the
camera, click [Preferences] and select [Images whose transfer settings
were specified with the camera] as the image type to be downloaded.
- Click [Lets you select and download images] to show the camera images
in a list, check the images before downloading and download only
selected images.
The downloaded images will be saved into folders according to their shooting date.

By default, when downloading is complete,
the thumbnails (tiny versions) of the
downloaded images display in
ZoomBrowser EX's Main Window.
Thumbnail------------'g_iiililJ
The downloaded symbol displays on

downloaded folders (the symbol will
disappear when you exit ZoomBrowser EX).
Next, print out the images (p. 21).
MemolY Card Reader COlletlion

1 Insert the memory card into the reader.
Use a separately sold card adapter if required.
See the manual for the memory card reader for its connection and handling instructions.
2 Select [View/Download Images using

Canon CameraWindow] when the
dialog to the right appears and click
[OK].
The Camera Control Window will display.
If the dialog above fails to appear, click the [Start] menu and select [All
Programs] or [Programs], followed by [Canon Utilities], [CameraWindow],
[PowerShot - IXY - IXUS - DV 6] and [CameraWindow], and proceed to
Step 3.

20 I Using the Software on the Windows Platform - The Basics
3 Click [Starts to download images].
You can adjust the settings, such as the type

• By default, all the images that have yet to be downloaded will

download to the [My Pictures] folder.
• To download images that have had their transfer settings set with the
• Click [Lets you select and download images] to show the memory card
images in a list, check the images before downloading and download
only selected images.
• See Memory Card Folder Structure (p. 77) for information about
memory card folder structures and file names.
The downloaded images are saved into folders according to the shooting date.
By default, when the download is complete, the thumbnails (tiny versions) of the
downloaded images display in ZoomBrowser EX's main window.
Next, print out the images (p. 21).

Printing Images
There are two ways in which images may be printed: One Photo per Page Print and Index Print.
This section explains the One Photo per Page Print method.
- Movies cannot be printed, but you can print stills after they have been
extracted from movies and saved to files.
-To use the Index Print option, click [Print] in the Main Window, followed by
[Index Print].
One Photo per Page Print

This option prints one image per page in a standard photo format. If you select multiple II II
images, it will print them on the corresponding number of pages.
1 Click [Print] in ZoomBrowser EX·s Main Window, followed by [One Photo Per Page
Print].
f' ZoomBrowser [X ·0 \I)ocumentsill1dSetl1l1gs\xx)(\JoJ\yOocumenls\MYPlclures\2005_
+
- If you have insta lied the Easy-
PhotoPrint program that
accompanied a Canon-brand
printer, you will proceed to the
Easy-PhotoPrint printing window
shown at the right when you
select [One Photo per Page Print]
accord ing to the defauIt setti ngs.
If a window similar to it opens,
read the Help menu for Easy-
PhotoPrint for instructions to proceed.
- To proceed to the ZoomBrowser EX printing window as shown in Step 2
when you select [One Photo per Page Print], click the [Tools] menu and
select [Preferences], followed by the [Printing] tab. Select [Use the Print
Function in ZoomBrowser EX].

221 Using the Software on the Windows Platform -The Basics
2 After confirming that [1. Select Images] is selected, select images.

You can select multiple images by holding the [Ctrl] down while clicking on successive
images.
The background of
selected images
changes to blue.
3 Click [2. Printer and Layout Settings] and adjust the categories as you feel
necessary.
Selects the printer

and the paper size
etc.
Sets printing to
borderless, etc.
II II
Place a check mark

here to print
shooting date/time
information with
images.
This button switches between images if

multiple images were selected.
4 Click [3. Print].

Printing will start.

This chapter explained the ZoomBrowser EX basics. Once you have mastered them, try the
advanced techniques.
Using the Software on the Windows Platform - Advanced Techniques (p. 24).
• A PDF-format manual for ZoomBrowser EX is also available. It provides

further inform'ation about the program's features and procedures. See Using
the PDF Manuals (p. 2).

This chapter explains various ZoomBrowser EX features.
Proceed to this chapter once you have mastered the basic ZoomBrowser EX procedures in the
Using the Software on the Windows Platform - The Basics chapter.
~ To confirm whether your camera supports these functions, please refer to

l...IJ Information about Your Camera (p. 87).
The ZoomBrowser EX Windows

This section describes the principal ZoomBrowser EX windows: the Main Window, Viewer
Window and Properties Window.
Main Window
This window is for displaying and organizing images downloaded to the computer.
Task Area (p. 25) Function Buttons (p. 27)
Display Mode
(p.26)
Display Control
Panel (p. 27)
Browser Area (p. 25)

Folders Area (p. 25) Switches between showing and hiding
the Task Area and Folders Area.

Task Area ';fZoomOrowser[X O'J)ocuments<lndSelt1l1!',s\xxx\MyOocumenlsIMYPlclurer,\2005_09_09
- ZoomBrowser EX's tasks are arranged here like

an index.
- Click a Task button to carry out the desired
task.
These features are desc'ribed in ZoomBrowser
EX Features (p. 30)
Folders Area
- Use this area to select folders. The images in the selected folder display in the Browser Area.
If you select a network drive in advance with Windows Explorer, you can display network
folders, but you cannot add, change or delete those folders in the Browser Area.
-If you selected Favorite Folders, only the folders registered in advance as Favorite Folders will
display. You are recommended to register a folder that you use frequently as one of the
Favorite Folders. If you selected All Folders, all the folders will display.
Methods for Registering a Favorite Folder

-If [Favorite Folders] is displayed: click [Add] and select a folder.
-If [All Folders] is displayed: select a folder and click [Add to Favorites].
- To delete a folder in the Favorite Folders area, select a folder and click the [Delete] button.
Browser Area
- The images in the folder selected in the Folders Area will display here.
The display style will vary according to your Display Mode selection.
Methods for Selecting Images in the Browser Area

- Selecting a single image: click on an image.
- Selecting multiple images: click on the first image and then hold the [Ctrl] key down
while clicking on additional images.
- Selecting consecutive images: click on the first image and then hold the [Shift] key down
while clicking on the last image.
- You can sort the image order in the Browser Area by file name, shooting date or other
characteristics by clicking the [Tools] menu and selecting [View] and [Sort by].
- The following icons will display around images according to their attributes.
~ Images shot with the camera's Stitch Assist mode
ID RAW images
ltiJ Movies
Images with sound memo attachments
r:= Protected images
Images shot with the camera's AEB function
Ci1 Images shot with the camera on end that are rotated in the display only

261 Using the Software on the Windows Platform - Advanced Techniques
Display Mode
• Selects the display style for the Browser Area.
Zoom Mode
Displays all the images in a folder as thumbnail
images. This mode is convenient for searching
for images since many can be displayed at
once.
If additional folders are nested within a

folder, their images are displayed as
thumbnails as well.
If you move the mouse cursor over a folder, ---f~~~~---'!'!!_

:0: will display on the upper right. Clicking
here displays that folder zoomed in.
Scroll Mode
This mode is convenient for checking the
images in multiple folders at once. If the
displayed folder is at the highest level, then all
thumbnails in the lower-level folders also
display. You can change the folder level (folder
depth) by clicking the [Tools] menu and
selecting [Preferences].
The images within nested folders also --~~~~---ii!iili+'-o

display.
Preview Mode
This mode displays the image at a larger size as
well as the image information.
Positioning the mouse pointer over a thumbnail causes the image to appear
at a higher magnification in a Mouse Over Window. You can turn off this
function by clicking the [Show Information], and removing the check
mark from the [Show Over Windows] option.

Display Control Panel
• This panel adjusts the display settings for the Browser Area.
Selection Menu Fit to Window Display Size
Use this to select or deselect all Changes the thumbnail size to Changes the size of the
the images in the Browser Area. fit them into the window. thumbnail in the Browser Area.
Show/Hide Image Menu Filter Images

Use this to display or hide image This feature filters your images by
information beneath the thumbnails, their Star Ratings, displaying only
such as the file name, shooting date those images in the Browser Area.
or Star Rating. One of three Star Ratings can be
assigned to an image in the Viewer
Select Button Window, the Properties Window, or
Use this to select images in the information column in the
in Zoom mode. Preview Mode.
Function Buttons
• These buttons are available for executing various functions.
View Image Button Slide Show Button Rotate Button
Displays the selected image Starts a slide show of the Rotates the selected
or movie in the Viewer selected images. image.
Window.
Properties Button Search Button Button

Displays information about Searches for images Deletes selected
the selected image in the using such criteria as the images or folders.
Properties Window. Star Rating,
modification date,
shooting date,
comments or keywords.

281 Using the Software on the Windows Platform -Advanced Techniques
Viewer Window
Double-click an image in the Browser Area to display it in the Viewer Window.
Edit Menu Display AF Frame

You can edit, eliminating red eyes, Displays the AF Frame
adjusting colors, cropping and (area used to focus).
inputting titles. You can also use it to
start up other programs for editing. Shooting
Information Synchronize Button
Display Button Synchronizes the
Print Button
Displays image display settings when
Prints the displayed image.
shooting multiple images are
information. displayed.
Image Selector Split Screen

Button Button
Switches between Displays
images. multiple
images at
Displays images in once. This is
the Viewer handy for
Window at their comparing
actual size. images.
Sets the image

display size to the
size in the Viewer
Window.
Zoom .-.-.1
Star Rating
Changes the image Sets the Star Rating for an image.
zoom setti ng.
Full Screen Button
Displays the image in the full screen mode. Click the
image or press any key on the keyboard to restore the
normal display mode.
-If a RAW image is displayed, the [Display Original Image] button displays
beneath it. Clicking this button displays the converted image in the Viewer
Window.
-If you are using Windows XP and display a movie file, the II (Capture Still
Frame) button will display beside the Star Ratings. Clicking this button
extracts still images from movies.

Properties Window
The Properties Window displays when you select an image in the Browser Area and click the
Properties button. The Properties Window does not display in the Preview Mode.
Shows or hides - - -.....

categories.
Star Rating
Sets the Star Rating
for an image.
Plays a sound memo attached
to an image.
Protect
Prevents an image from being
overwritten or deleted.
Comment
You can type a comment here.
Keywords
Sets the keywords used in
searches.
Brightness Histogram
A graph of the highlights and
shadows distribution in an
image.
Shooting Information
Displays detailed
information about the
shooting settings when the
image was captured, such
as the shutter speed or
exposure setting. The Image Selector Buttons
camera model will Switches between images.
determine what
information is displayed.

30 I Using the Software on the Windows Platform - Advanced Techniques
ZoomBrowser EX Features
This section briefly introduces the Task Area functions.

LMJ Information about Your Camera (p. 87).
Acquire &Camera Settings

Connect to Camera Acquire &Camera Settings
Clicking this connects to your camera and
opens the Camera Control Window, which lets
you perform the following operations.
-Acquire Images
Downloads images from the camera/memory card (p. 16, 19).
Additionally, you can download sound files recorded with the Sound Recorder function on
the camera.
-Print Images
Selects and prints the images in a camera. You can print numerous ways, using DPOF
settings, the Index Print option, One Photo per Page Print option, or by selecting images
before printing.
-Set to Camera
Sets camera settings, such as the My Camera settings (p. 39). It also uploads images from
the computer to the camera.
-Remote Shooting
Allows you to operate the camera shutter from the computer (p. 35).
Connect to EOS Camera
This can only be used with EOS series cameras. For details on this function, see the user guide
for your camera.
Acquire Images from Memory Card
Download images from a memory card (p. 19).
You can also download sound files recorded with the Sound Recorder function, or select
images on the memory card and print them.
View & Classify

View as a Slide Show Classify
Starts a slide show of the images selected in the
Browser Area.
Rename Multiple Files
Changes the file names of the selected images in a single pass.
Classify into Folder
Classifies images and saves them into a specified folder.
Search
Performs image searches using criteria such as the Star Rating, modification date, shooting
date, comments or keywords. Star Ratings, comments and keywords can be set in the image
information column in the Preview Mode or in the Properties Window.

Edit
Edit Image
Allows you to perform image editing, such as
cropping, image correction and red-eye
correction. You can also use it to start other image editing programs.
Stitch Photos
Merges multiple images and creates a single large panoramic image (p. 38).
Edit Movie
Edits movies or still images strung together. You can add text as titles, or background music,
and apply various effects (p. 34).
Process RAW Images

Converts RAW images into standard images. You can adjust the image brightness, contrast
and color balance among other attributes during conversion.
Export
Export Still Images Export
Allows you to change the image size or type,
and export it as a new image.
Export Movies
Allows you to change the movie size or type, and export it as a new movie.
Extract frames from a movie

Extracts still images from movies over a specified interval and saves them as image files
(Windows XP only).
Export Shooting Properties

Allows you to select the necessary data from the shooting information and export it as a text
file.
Export as a Screen Saver

Exports the image as a screen saver file.
Export as a Wallpaper
Exports the image as a wallpaper file.
Backup to CD
Copies images to a CD-R/RW disk for backup.
The Backup to CD function can only be used on computers satisfying the

following requirements.
• Windows XP is preinstalled
• A CD-R/RW drive is included as standard equipment

Print
One Photo per Page Print
Prints one image per page (p. 21).
You can print photo prints easily.
II II
Index Print
Lines up small versions of the images in rows and prints.
Print Using Other Software

Select the software to use and then print.
Internet
Email Images
Converts the selected images to the
appropriate size for transmission bye-mail. You
can also use it to automatically start an e-mail program after conversion.
• To return to the previous screen after selecting a task, click [Return to Main
Menu] at the bottom of the task screen.
• Various Help functions are available in Zoom Browser EX. Click the [Help]
menu, [7] button or [Help] button to display topics about operational
procedures or the functions available.

Replaying Movies
, Double-click an image with a movie icon in ZoomBrowser EX's Browser Area.
The Viewer Window will open and play the movie.
You can save the displayed

scene as a still image by
clicking here.
You can control the

movie's playback and ...
sound volume.
Windows 2000, Windows Me and Windows 98 SE

QuickTime is required to play and edit movies. To install QuickTime, please follow these
procedures.
1. Place the Canon Digital Camera Solution Disk in the CD-ROM drive.
If the installer panel fails to appear automatically, display it using the procedures in the
How to Display the Installer Panel section (p. 12).
2 Click the QuickTime [Install] button.

DIGITAL CAMERA
so"i~tio~'i)"i;k""""''''''''''''''''''
Digital Camera Software
Follow the onscreen instructions to proceed with the installation.

Editing Movies
You can create and edit movies: link movies and stills that have been downloaded to your
computer, add background music, superimpose titles and other text, and apply various effects
to the movies.
-The QuickTime program is required to replay or edit movies on the Windows

2000, Windows Me or Windows 98 SE platform. Install it during procedures
in the" Replaying Movies" topic in the Windows 2000, Windows Me and
Windows 98 Sf section (p. 33).
- Movies are saved as Motion JPEG AVI movies.
1 Click [Edit] in ZoomBrowser EX's Main Window, followed by [Edit Movie].
2 Click [1. Add Images] and select the image (movie or still) you wish to edit.
You can select multiple movies or stills.
3 Follow the steps at the left of the window to edit the movie and save it.
Follow these steps Click this button for detailed
to proceed. operational instructions.
Click this button to

play the movie
being edited.
Storyboard Area - - - - -..... Transition Effects Box

Displays thumbnails of the selected Appears between adjacent images
images. and displays the symbols of the
Links images in order from left to right. transition effects linking images.

Operating the Shutter Remotely
You can record still images by using a computer to control the shutter of a connected camera.
This is particularly useful for checking images on the larger display of the computer as you
record them and for high volume photography without worrying about filling the camera's
memory card.
Rregoring for Remote Shooling

1 Attach the supplied interface cable to the computer's USB port and the camera's
DIGITAL terminal and place the camera in the correct mode for connecting.
• Methods for connecting the camera to the computer and placing it in

the correct mode for connecting vary between camera models. Please
refer to the Camera User Guide.
• Perform the settings described in First Time Camera is Connected to a
Computer (p. 17) the first time you connect the camera to the
computer.
2 Open the lens cover or remove the lens cap on models equipped with them.
Proceed to the next step if your model does not have one.
3 Click the [Remote shooting] tab.

4 Click [Starts Remote Shooting].
5 Select a destination for the captured images and click [OK].

RemoteCapture task Window

The RemoteCapture Task window has the following features.
Shows/Hides the Size and Resolution Selector

viewfinder or detailed Selects the size and resolution at which images are captured.
settings area.
_ - - - - Rotation Settings
Sets the rotation
parameters for
images after they are
captured.
You can add
comments to images Release Button
by placi ng a check Releases the
mark here and shutter.
typing text in the
boxes below. .';;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;';;;;;;;;;;;;- Slide this to zoom
the camera in or out.
Viewfinder Display Start/Stop Viewfinder

Click the [Start/Stop Button
Viewfinder] button Sta rts or stops the
while a connection to viewfinder display.
the camera is open to
display the image Refresh Button
appearing in the Resets the exposu re,
camera's viewfinder. focus and white
balance.
Set the basic camera settings here.
-The settings available in the RemoteCapture Task window vary between

camera models.
- RemoteCapture Task locks the exposure and focus settings for the subject
matter in the Viewfinder section. If the lighting or distance to the subject
changes, click to reset these settings.

Remote Shooting
1 Click and check the subject in the viewfinder.

2 Change the image size or resolution, the rotation settings and the settings at the
bottom of the window as required.
If you intend to hold the camera vertically to photograph a subject, you can save the
image to the computer with the correct orientation if you set the rotation settings in
advance.
If your camera's shooting mode is equipped with the Auto Rotate

function and you set it to On, the image will automatically be rotated
and appear in the correct viewing orientation in the RemoteCapture Task
window.
3 Click the [Release] button.
• You can release the shutter by pressing the camera's shutter button or
the keyboard's space key.
• Other than the shutter button, the camera1s buttons and switches,
including the zoom, cannot be operated while the camera is being
controlled with the Remote Shooting function.
• You may notice that the interval between the shutter release and
activation is slightly longer for remote shooting than when the camera
is used independently.

Merging Panoramic Images · PholoSlilch

You can create a wide panoramic image by merging several images. It is easier to merge
images if they are shot with the camera·s Stitch Assist mode because PhotoStitch can
automatically detect the image order and orientation.
Imuges Shol in _Iilth Assisl Mode .

A sequence of images shot in Stitch Assist mode is saved into a single folder when it is
downloaded from the camera. In addition, the symbol below displays by the image in the
Browser Area.
Symbol displayed by images shot in Stitch

Assist mode.
- See the Camera User Guide for information about shooting in Stitch
Assist" mode.
-Images shot in Stitch Assist mode with a wide converter, teleconverter
or close-up lens cannot be merged accurately.
Sluffing Pholo_lilth
1 Click [Edit] in the ZoomBrowser EX's Main Window and click [Stitch Photos].
2 Click [1. Select Images] and select several images in the Browser Area.
3 Click [2. Open PhotoStitch].
Instructions
4 Merge the images following the instructions in the guidance panel at the top of
the PhotoStitch window.

Enioy Customizing Your Camera with the My
Camera Settings
The start-up image, start-up sound, shutter sound, operation sound, and self-timer sound are
called the My Camera settings. You can add your favorite images and sounds from your
computer to the My Camera settings. This topic explains how to upload the My Camera
settings saved onto your computer to the camera and vice versa.
DisRla,ing the M, Camera Window

• Methods for connecting the camera to the computer and placing it in

• Perform the settings described in First Time Camera is Connected to a
Computer (p. 17) the first time you connect the camera to the
computer.
2 Click the [Set to Camera] tab.
3 Click [Set My Camera].

The My Camera window will display.
Confirms/changes camera settings

40 I Using the Software on the Windows Platform - Advanced Techniques
The My Camera Window features

ZoomBrowser EX already contains several pre-recorded My Camera settings. You can check
these items with the My Camera window.
Tabs
Click here to switch between adjusting the settings individually or in themed sets.
Play Button
Plays the audio from the
settings file in the
Displays the list of camera.
settings files saved Displays the settings in
onto the computer. the camera.
Delete Button
Deletes a settings file
from the camera.
Play Button Save to Camera Button

Plays the audio from Saves a computer
the selected settings setti ngs fi Ie onto the
file. camera.
Delete Button - - - - -.... - - - - - - - Save to PC Button

Deletes a settings file from Saves a camera settings
the computer. file onto the computer.
For cameras that can only register one My

Camera setting, the [Return to factory default
settings] button will display. Clicking this
button will return the My Camera setting to
the factory default setting.

Saving the M, Camera Settings to tBe Camera
- My Camera settings can be selected and saved in either of two ways to the
camera: individually or in theme sets.
-The "Animal" theme, for example, features an animal in the start-up image
and animal calls in each of the sound files. The names of the prepared files
forthe various My Camera settings themes all begin with the same root
name. The start-up image and sound files in the "Animal" theme, for
example, all begin with "Animal-".
I Select the [Setup as a theme] tab in the My Camera window.

To set the start-up image or sound individually, click the [Set individually] tab and select it.
2 Select the settings file you wish to save to the camera from the My Computer list.
3 Select the setting from the Camera list that you would like to change and click
[Save to Camera].
This concludes the process of saving the My Camera setting~ to the camera.
The Camera list setting will change to the selected file. If a setting for this category has
previously been saved to the camera, it will be overwritten.
Repeat steps 1-3 as req uired.

To use this data on the camera, change the start-up image and sound settings on the
camera itself. Please see the Camera User Guide for these instructions.
Saving the Camera's My Camera Settings to the Computer

I Select the [Setup as a theme] tab in the My Camera window.
To set the start-up image or sound individually, click the [Set individually] tab and select it.
2 Select the settings files from the Camera list that you wish to save to the
computer.
3 Click [Save to PC].
4 Add a name to the settings file you are saving and click [OK].
This concludes the process of saving the My Camera settings to the computer.
Repeat steps 1-4 as required.

Adding New Data to the NlJ Camera Window >
Create a new image or sound file and add it to the My Camera window.
• Adding Image and Sound Files After Creating Them
Adding Original Start-up Images and Sounds After Creating Them

You can effortlessly create start-up image and sound files using the My Camera Maker
program (Windows XP or Windows 2000 only).
1 Click the [Edit] menu in the ZoomBrowser EX Main Window and select [Manage
My Camera].
2 Click the [Set individually] tab in the My Camera window, followed by the [Create
My Camera Data] button.
Add File Button

Adds images and sound files for use
as settings files. Added files display
in the list.
Connect to camera Button --------~

Connects to the camera.
My Camera Maker will start.
3 Follow the instructions at the top part

of the My Camera Maker window and
create image or sound files.
Instructions

4 Once you have saved the file, click and close the My Camera Maker window.
You have now succeeded in adding the file as a settings file to the computer.
5 To connect to the camera, click

[Connect to Camera].
You can add the settings files you just
added to the computer to the camera using
the same procedures as in "Saving the My
Camera Settings to the Camera (p. 41).
II
- Use settings like those below when creating an image file for the start-
up image using an image editing program other than My Camera
Maker.
Compression Method : JPEG (Baseline JPEG)
Data Sampling : 4:2:0 or 4:2:2
Pixels (w x h) : 320 x 240 pixels
-Use settings like those below when creating a sound file using a sound
recording program other than My Camera Maker.
Compression Method : WAV (Monaural)
Quantifying Bits : 8 bit
Sampling Frequency : 11.025 kHz or 8.000 kHz
Use the following lengths as guidelines for the length of sound file that
can be saved to the camera.
Duration in Seconds
Type
11.025 kHz 8.000 kHz
Start-Up Sound 1 .0 sec. or less 1 .2 sec. or less
Shutter Sound 0.3 sec. or less 0.4 sec. or less
Operation Sound 0.3 sec. or less 0.4 sec. or less
Self-Timer Sound 2.0 sec. or less 2.0 sec. or less

This chapter explains the basic procedures for installing the software. Read this material before
you connect the camera to the computer for the first time.
Installing the Software

Start by installing the software from the Canon Digital Camera Solution Disk.
~ See ArcSoft PhotoStudio (p. 72) for details on how to install ArcSoft
UJ PhotoStudio.
Items to PreRure
- Your camera and computer
- Canon Digital Camera Solution Disk
-Interface cable supplied with the camera
Installation Procedures ,
I Close any programs that are running.
2 Place the Canon Digital Camera Solution Disk in the
computer's CD-ROM drive.
3 Double-click the [Canon Digital Camera Installer] icon
in the CD-ROM window.
4 Click the Digital Camera Software

[Install] button. DIGITAL CAMERA
s'~'i~ti;;;;'i)"i~k"""""""""""""
Installer Panel

5 Select [Easy Installation] and click
[Next].
Select [Custom Installation] to select

programs individually for installation.
6 Click [Agree] if you agree to all of the

terms of the software license
agreement.
7 Review the installation settings and
click [Next].
Follow the onscreen instructions to
proceed.
8 When the installation is over, click [OK].
9 Click [Exit] in the installer panel and

remove the disk from the CD-ROM drive.
This concludes the software installation.
~ See Uninstalling the Software (p. 74) to delete the software installed
LII with these procedures.
Continue by downloading images to the computer (p. 46).

This chapter explains the procedures for using ImageBrowser to download the camera's images'
to the computer and print them.
Read this chapter after completing the preparations in the Using the Software on the
Macintosh Platform - Preparations section.
Downloading Images to the Computer

Begin by downloading the images to your computer. The downloading procedure is slightly
different according to whether you are using a camera to computer connection (see below) or
a memory card reader (p. 48).
CameEa to CompUleE COlne,lioll

~ Procedures for attaching the camera to the computer and placing it in

LIt the correct mode for connecting vary between camera models. See the
Camera User Guide.

If it does not open, click the [CameraWindow] icon in the Dock (the bar at the bottom of
the desktop). To set whether this window automatically opens when you connect the
camera to the computer, remove the check mark from the [Start when a camera is
connected] in the [File] menu in the Camera Control window.

2 Download images.
Download the images using the camera or
the computer. By default, the downloaded
images are saved into the [Pictures] folder.
Camera Control Window
You can adjust the settings, such as the type

Using the Camera to Download Images (Direct Transfer Function)
-If the conditions are right for the Direct Transfer function, the Direct
Transfer settings menu will appear in the LCD monitor. In addition, the
~¢VI (Print/Share) button will light if your camera is equipped with one.
- See the Camera User Guide for instructions regarding Direct Transfer
settings and procedures.
Set the Direct Transfer settings on the

camera and press the ~¢VI (Print/Share)
button or the [SET] button.
Using the Computer to Download Images

Click [Starts to download images].

481 Using the Software on the Macintosh Platform - The Basics
• By default, all the images that have yet to be downloaded will download.
• To download images that have had their transfer settings set with the
• Click [Lets you select and download images] to show the camera images
in a list, check the images before downloading and download only
selected images.
downloaded images display in ImageBrowser's Browser Window.
The downloaded symbol

displays on downloaded
folders (the symbol will
disappear when you exit
ImageBrowser).
Thumbnail ---------+----+0
Continue by printing out an image (p. 50).
Memory Card Reader Connection
1 Insert the memory card into the reader.

Use a separately sold card adapter if required.
See the manual for the memory card reader for details on how to connect and use the
reader.
If it does not open, click the [CameraWindow] icon in the Dock (the bar at the bottom of
the desktop). To set whether this window automatically opens when you connect the
camera to the computer, remove the check mark from the [Start when a camera is
connected] in the [File] menu in the Camera Control window.

2 Click [Starts to download images].
You can set the type of image to download

and the destination folder by clicking
[Preferences] .
- By the default settings, all images are downloaded to the [Pictures]

folder.
- To download images that have had their transfer settings set with the
were specified with the camera] as the type of image for downloading.
-Click [Lets you select and download images] to show the memory card
images in a list, check the images before downloading and download
only selected images.
- See Memory Card Folder Structure (p. 77) for information about
memory card folder structures and file names.
downloaded images will display in ImageBrowser's Browser Window when downloading
is complete.
Continue by printing out an image (p. 50).

50 I Using the Software on the Macintosh Platform - The Basics
Printing Images
There are three ways in which images may be printed: One Photo per page Print, Index Print
and Layout Print. This section explains the One Photo per page Print method.
~ Movies cannot be printed, but you can print stills after they have been
LjJ extracted from movies and saved to files.
One Photo per gage Print

This option prints one image per page in a standard photo format. If you select multiple
II II
images, it will print them on the corresponding number of pages.
1 Select the images to print.

Clicking on an image selects it and displays a blue frame around it. To select multiple
images, hold down the [shift] or [88] (command) key while clicking on images.
A blue frame
displays around
selected images.
2 Click [Print] and select [One Photo per

page Print].
Selecting [Index Print] allows you to print the thumbnails and shooting
information in a chart.
Selecting [Layout Print] allows you to layout and print multiple images on
a single sheet of paper.

3 Set the categories as you feel necessary.
Selects a printer. ;;;~~::=J~~~~;:,iliiiiiiif

Selects options such as the paper size
and orientation when you click
[Page Setup].
Configures the auto trimming
Place a check mark here to print the

function.
shooting dates/times with the
_~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
images.
Sets the number of copies printed.
Click
images if you selected multiple
images.
4 Click [Print].
The Print window will now open.
5 After setting the number of copies, and other settings, click [Print].
6 After the printing finishes, click to close the window.
This chapter explained the ImageBrowser basics.
Once you have mastered them, try the advanced techniques.

Using the Software on the Macintosh Platform - Advanced Techniques (p. 52).
~ A PDF-format manual for ImageBrowser is also available. It provides further

LII information about the program1s features and procedures. See Using the PDF
Manuals (p. 2).

This chapter explains various ImageBrowser features.
Proceed to this chapter once you have mastered the basic ImageBrowser procedures in the
Using the Software on the Macintosh Platform - The Basics chapter.

l..IJ
Information about Your Camera (p. 87).
The ImageBrowser Windows

This section describes the principal ImageBrowser windows: the Browser Window, Viewer
Window and File Information Window.
Browser Window
This window is for displaying and organizing images downloaded to the computer.
Browser Area (p. 53) Display Mode (p. 54)
Explorer Panel (p. 53) Display Control Panel (p. 55) Control Panel (p. 55)

53
Explorer Panel
- Use this area to select folders. The images in the selected folder display in the Browser Area.
-If you selected Favorite Folders, only the folders registered in advance as Favorite Folders will
display. You are recommended to register a folder that you use frequently as one of the
Favorite Folders. If you selected All Folders, all the folders will display.
Methods for Registering a Favorite Folder

-If [Favorite Folders] is displayed: click [Add] and select a folder.
-If [All Folders] is displayed: select a folder and click [Add to Favorites].
Browser Area
- The images in the folder selected in the Explorer Panel will display here.
The display style will vary according to your Display Mode selection.
Methods for Selecting Images in the Browser Area

- Selecting a single image: click on an image.
- Selecting multiple images: click on the first image and then hold the [shift] or [88]
(command) key down while clicking on additional images.
- Selecting consecutive images: click on the first image and then hold the [shift] and
[option] keys down while clicking on the last image.
1.
- The following types of icon will display around images according to their attributes.
Images shot with the camera's Stitch Assist mode
RAW images
Movies
Images with sound memo attachments
Protected images
'II Images shot with the camera's AEB function
Images shot with the camera on end that are rotated in the display only

541 Using the Software on the Macintosh Platform - Advanced Techniques
Display Mode
• Selects the display style for the Browser Area.
Preview
This mode displays the image at a larger size as
well as the image information.
List
Displays the images in the folder selected in the
Explorer Panel section in rows and columns.
TimeTunnel
Displays images in chronological order in a
simulated time tunnel. You can move along a
timeline from the past to the present using the
slider that appears at the window's right.

I 55
Display Control Panel
• This panel adjusts the display settings for the Browser Area.
Display Size Selection Menu
Changes the size of the thumbnail in Use this to select or deselect all
the Browser Area. the in the Browser Area.
Filter Images Hide Buttons

This feature filters your images by their Star Left: Hides the Explorer Panel.
Ratings, displaying only those images in the Middle: Hides the control panel.
Browser Area. Right: Hides the image
One of three Star Ratings can be assigned to information in the Preview
an image in the Viewer Window, the File display mode.
Information Window, or in the information
column in the Preview display mode.
Control Panel
• The control panel contains buttons for executing various functions.
The functions displayed here are explained in the Control Panel Features section (p. 58).

Viewer Window
Double-click an image in the Browser Area to display it in the Viewer Window.
----Zoom
Changes the
image zoom
setting.
Star Ratings
Menu
Sets the Star
Rating for an
Image Button image.
Switches between
images. Show Information Button
Displays the AF frame
(focal point frame) and
Save Button
the shooting information.
Saves the edited image.
Button
Edit Menu
Prints the displayed image.
You can edit, performing such as
cropping, adjusting colors and Orlc::lntne~iS,
Full Screen Button
eliminating red eyes and inserting texts.
Displays the image in the full screen
You can also use it to start up other
mode. (You can also double-click an
programs for editing.
image to display it in full screen mode).
Click the image or press any key on the
Number of Displays Menu keyboard to restore the normal display
Displays multiple images at mode.
once. This is handy for
comparing images. Svrlchronlize Button
'\Ir\rhrnr\17'~C the
display
settings when multiple
images are displayed.
-If a RAW image is displayed, the [Show Original Image] button displays
beneath it. Clicking this button displays the converted image in the Viewer
Window.
-If a movie file is displayed, the [Save as Still Image] button will display
beside the Star Ratings.

file Informalion .indow
The File Information Window displays when you select an image in the Browser Area, click the
[File] menu and select [Get Info]. The File Information Window does not display in the Preview
display mode.
Star Rating Menu

Sets the Star for an image.
Shows or hides
categories.
Comment
Plays a sound
_~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Youcantypeacomment
here.
memo attached Keyword

to an image. Sets the keywords used in
searches.
Lock -------....~71\\i> /2.i\i/\ii /\>/ii Brightness Histogram

Prevents an image A graph of the highlights
from being and shadows distribution
overwritten or in an image.
deleted.
Image Shooting Information

Switches between images. Displays detailed information
about the shooting settings when
the image was captured, such as
the shutter speed or exposure
setting. The camera model will
File Name determine what information is
You can change displayed.
file names.

ImageBrowser Features
This section provides a brief introduction to ImageBrowser features.

LIJ
Information about Your Camera (p. 87).
(ontrol 'snel feulures
Canon Camera
Opens the Camera Control Window, which lets you perform the following operations.
Acquire Images
Downloads images from the camera/memory card (p. 46, 48).
Additionally, you can download sound files recorded with the Sound Recorder function on
the camera. Refer to the ImageBrowser PDF manual or Help for download instructions.
Print
Selects and prints the images in a camera or memory card. You can print numerous ways:
print all images, print a contact sheet (index) of all images, print using DPOF settings, or by
selecting images before printing.
Set to Camera
Sets camera settings, such as the My Camera settings (p. 67). It also uploads images from the
computer to the camera.
Remote Shooting
Allows you to operate the camera shutter from the computer (p. 63).
View Image
Displays the selected image or movie in the Viewer Window.
SlideShow
Starts a slide show of the selected images. Click the [View] menu and select [Slide Show
Options] to set the slide show settings.
Internet
Create Images for Email
Converts the selected images to the appropriate size for transmission bye-mail. You can also
use it to automatically start an e-mail program after conversion.

Print
One Photo per page Print
Prints one image per page (p. 50).
You can print photo prints easily.
II II
Index Print
Lines up small versions of the images in rows and prints.
Layout Print
Allows you to freely arrange multiple images on a single page and print. You can also insert
captions and titles.
Send to Trash
Sends the selected images or folders to the Trash.
funElions SeleEled 110m Menus

Search Images: [File] menu, [Search]
Searches for images based on such criteria as Star Ratings, dates, keywords or captions.
Export Images: [File] menu, [Export Images]

- Edit and Save: allows you to change the file type or size and export the file.
- Export Shooting Properties: allows you to export the shooting properties as a text file.
- Export as a Screensaver: Exports the image as a screen saver file.
- Export an Image as Wallpaper: Exports the image as a wallpaper file.
Organize Images: [File] menu, [Organize Image]

-Sort Images: sorts images according to criteria such as the shooting date or Star Rating and
saves them into a specified folder.
-Rename: changes the files names of multiple images in a single pass.
Convert RAW Images: [File] menu, [RAW image processing]

Converts RAW images. You can adjust the image brightness, contrast and color bala.nce
among other attributes during conversion.
Merge Panoramas: [Edit] menu, [PhotoStitch]

Merges multiple images and creates a single large panoramic image (p. 66).
Edit Movies: [Edit] menu, [Movie Edit]

Edits movies or still images strung together. You can add titles or background music and
apply various effects (p. 62).
Extracting Stills from Movies: [Edit] menu, [Extract frames from a movie]
Extracts still images from movies over a specified interval and saves them as image files.

60 I Using the Software on the Macintosh Platform - Advanced Techniques
Display Settings: [View] menu, [View Settings]

Hides or shows image information beneath the thumbnail, such as the file name or the
shooting date and time.
Sort Images: [View] menu, [Sort]

Arranges image order in the Browser Area according to criteria such as the filename, file
modification date, file size or shooting date.

Replaying Movies
, Double-click an image with a movie icon in ImageBrowser's Browser Area.
The movie will appear in the Viewer
Window.
Movie I L U I I I - - -.....
2 Click the button.
You can control the

movie's playback and
sound volume.
You can save the displayed scene

as a still image by clicking here.

621 Using the Software on the Macintosh Platform -Advanced Techniques
Editing Movies
You can create and edit movies: link movies and stills that have been downloaded to your
computer, add background music, superimpose titles and other text, and apply various effects
to the movies.
1 Select the image(s) to edit in ImageBrowser's Browser Area (movies or stills).

You can select multiple movies or stills.
2 Click the [Edit] menu and select [Movie Edit].
3 Follow the steps displayed in the middle of the window to edit the movie and save
it.
Follow these steps

to proceed.
I-----+Hto- Instructions
Click this button

for detailed
operational
instructions.
Click this button Storyboard Area Transition Effect Box

to play the movie Displays thumbnails of the Appears between adjacent
being edited. selected images. images and displays the
Links images in order from symbols of the transition
left to right. effects linking images.

Operating the Shutter Remotely
You can record still images by using a computer to control the shutter of a connected camera.
This is particularly useful for checking images on the larger display of the computer as you
record them and for high volume photography without worrying about filling the camera's
memory card.
PreRoring for Remote Shooting

- Methods for connecting the camera to the computer and placing it in

-If the Camera Control Window does not automatically appear, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock (the bar at the bottom of the
desktop).
2 Open the lens cover or remove the lens cap on models equipped with them.
Proceed to the next step if your model does not have one.
3 Click the [Remote shooting] tab.
4 Click [Starts Remote Shooting].
5 Select a destination for the captured images and click [Choose].

RemoleCaRlure Jask Window

The RemoteCapture Task window has the following features.
Size and Resolution Selector

Shows/Hides the Selects the size and resolution at which
viewfinder or images are captured.
detailed settings
area.
...----- Rotation Settings
-------
Sets the rotation
I "If Hide VieWFinder
"/f·HideshootingdetaUs
parameters for
images after they are
You can add - - - - - 8 A . d d comments shown below captured.
comments to images
by placing a check Release Button
mark here and Releases the
typing text in the shutter.
boxes below.
Slide this to zoom
the camera in or out.
Viewfinder Display
Start/Stop Viewfinder
Click the [Start/Stop
Button
Viewfinder] button
Starts or stops the
while a connection to
viewfinder display.
the camera is open to settin",~ ~
display the image .
appearing in the
camera's viewfinder. •
':)
Refresh Button
Resets the exposure,
focus and white
. '
balance.
\ 'II
.
; u ....,....... ~
I
Set the camera shooting settings here.
• The settings available in the RemoteCapture Task window vary between

camera models.
• RemoteCapture Task locks the exposure and focus settings for the subject
matter in the Viewfinder section. If the lighting or distance to the subject
changes, click to reset these settings.

Remote Shooting
1 Click and check the subject in the viewfinder.

2 Change the image size or resolution, the rotation settings and the settings at the
bottom of the window as required.
If you intend to hold the camera vertically to photograph a subject, you can save the
image to the computer with the correct orientation if you set the rotation settings in
advance.
If your camera's shooting mode is equipped with the Auto Rotate

function and you set it to On, the image will automatically be rotated
and appear in the correct viewing orientation in the RemoteCapture Task
window.
3 Click the [Release] button.
• You can also release the shutter by pressing the camera's shutter button
or the keyboard's space key.
• Other than the shutter button, the camera's buttons and switches,
including the zoom, cannot be operated while the camera is being
controlled with the Remote Shooting function.
• You may notice that the interval between the shutter release and
activation is slightly longer for remote shooting than when the camera
is used independently.

661 Using the Software on the Macintosh Platform -Advanced Techniques
Merging Panoramic Images · PholoSlilch

You can create a wide panoramic image by merging several images. It is easier to merge
images if they are shot with the camera's Stitch Assist mode because PhotoStitch can
automatically detect the image order and orientation.
Images Shot in Stitch Assist Mode

A sequence of images shot in Stitch Assist mode is saved into a single folder when it is
downloaded from the camera. In addition, the symbol below displays by the image in the
Browser Area.
Symbol displayed by images shot in Stitch Assist

mode.
- See the Camera User Guide for information about shooting in

Stitch Assist mode.
-Images shot in Stitch Assist mode with a wide converter,
teleconverter or close-up lens cannot be merged accurately.
Stading PhotoStitch
,. Select a series of images in the ImageBrowser's Browser Area.
2 Click the [Edit] menu and select
[PhotoStitch] .
Instructions
3 Merge the images following the

instructions in the guidance panel at the top of the PhotoStitch window.

I 67
Enioy Customizing Your Camera with the My
Camera Settings
The start-up image, start-up sound, shutter sound, operation sound, and self-timer sound are
called the My Camera settings. You can add your favorite images and sounds from your
computer to the My Camera settings. This topic explains how to upload the My Camera
settings saved onto your computer to the camera and vice versa.
DisRII,ing the fA, (Imell Bindo.

- Procedures for attaching the camera to the computer and placing it in

the correct mode for connecting vary between camera models. See the
Camera User Guide.
-If the Camera Control Window does not automatically appear, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock (the bar at the bottom of the
desktop).
2 Click the [Set to Camera] tab.
3 Click [Set My Camera].


The My Camera Window

ImageBrowser already contains several pre-recorded My Camera settings items. You can check
these items with the My Camera window.
Type - - - - - - - - - - Save to Camera

Select the settings type. Play Button
Save to Computer
Plays the audio from
the settings file in the
- - - - - camera.
Displays the list
of settings files
saved onto the Displays the
computer. settings in the
camera.
~
~~ Delete Button
Deletes a setti ngs
fi Ie from the
camera.
Play Button - - - -..... Send to Trash Button Save to Camera Button

Plays the audio from the Deletes a settings file CI ick here to save the
selected settings file. from the computer. settings onto the
camera.
For cameras that can only register one

My Camera setting, the [Return to
factory default settings] button will
display. Clicking this button will return
the My Camera setting to the factory
default setting.

Saving the My Camera Settings to the Camera
- My Camera settings can be selected and saved in either of two ways to the
camera: individually or in theme sets.
-The "Animal" theme, for example, features an animal in the start-up image
and animal calls in each of the sound files. The names of the prepared files
for the various My Camera settings themes all begin with the same root
name. The start-up image and sound files in the "Animal" theme, for
example, all begin with "Animal-".
1 Select the type of setting in the Type list box that you wish to save to the camera.
2 Select the setting from the Computer list that you would like to add.
3 Select the setting in the Camera list that you would like to change and click the
button.
The Camera list setting will change to the selected file. If a setting for this category has
previously been saved to the c.amera, it will be overwritten.
Repeat steps 1-3 as required.
4 Click the [Save to Camera] button.

This concludes the process of saving the My Camera settings to the camera.
To use this data on the camera, change the start-up image and 'sound settings on the
camera itself. Please see the Camera User Guide for these instructions.
Saving the Camera's MJ Camela Settings to the Comltutel

1 Select the type of setting you wish to save to the computer from the Type list box.
2 Select the setting in the Camera list that you wish to save to the computer.
3 Click the button.
4 Input a file name to the selected setting and click the [OK] button.
This concludes the process of saving the My Camera settings to the computer.
Repeat steps 1-4 as req uired.

70 I Using the Software on the Macintosh Platform - Advanced Techniques
Adding Ne. Dsla 10 Ihe NI, CameFO .indow

Create a new image or sound file and add it to the My Camera window.
• Adding Image and Sound Files After Creating Them
Create an Original Start-up Image File and then Add It

Start by using an image editing program to create the image file that will become the start-up
image and save it to the computer.
, Click the [File] menu iO the ImageBrowser Main Window and select [Canon
Camera] and [My camera].
2 Select the [Start-up Image] in Type.
3 Click [Add].
Add Button - - - - - ~:~~;:::;:~ l:;0·0·S0+~s~'df~67~:;~h·?07;00:2;li/ii<i

Adds images and
sound files for use as
settings files. Added
files display in the list.
Connect to Camera Button

Connects to the camera.
4 Select the file you created and click [Open].

This concludes the process for adding new data.
5 To connect to the camera, click [Connect to Camera].

You can add the settings files you just added to the computer to the camera using the
same procedures as in Saving the My Camera Settings to the Camera (p. 69).
II II

Add an Original Sound File
Change the file to a WAV sound file after you have copied the sound file to the computer.
Then proceed with the steps as described in Create an Original Start-up Image File and then
Add It.
• Use settings like those below when creating an image file for the start-
up image with an image editing program.
Compression Method : JPEG (Baseline JPEG)
Data Sampling : 4:2:0 or 4:2:2
Pixels (w x h) : 320 x 240 pixels
• Use settings like those below when creating a sound file with a sound
recording program.
Compression Method : WAV (Monaural)
Quantifying Bits : 8 bit
Sampling Frequency : 11.025 kHz or 8.000 kHz
Use the following lengths as guidelines for the length of sound file that
can be saved to the camera.
Duration in Seconds
Type
11.025 kHz 8.000 kHz
Start-Up Sound 1.0 sec. or less 1.2 sec. or less
Shutter Sound 0.3 sec. or less 0.4 sec. or less
Operation Sound 0.3 sec. or less 0.4 sec. or less
Self-Timer Sound 2.0 sec. or less 2.0 sec. or less

This chapter introduces and explains how to install ArcSoft PhotoStudio, which is on the CD-
ROM supplied with your camera. It also explains how to uninstall the programs.
Read the Troubleshooting section in this chapter if you experience a problem using the
programs.
ArcSofl PholoSludio
ArcSoft PhotoStudio is a high-performance yet easy-to-use image editing program from
ArcSoft, Inc. It can process, edit and print images. It includes color corrections, brightness
adjustments and special effects. Install it from the supplied CD-ROM, the Canon Digital Camera
Solution Disk, as required.
Installing ArcSoft RhotoStudio '

Windows
1 Close all programs that are running.

2 Place the Canon Digital Camera Solution Disk in the CD-ROM drive.
If the installer panel displays, click [Exit] to close it.
3 Click the [Start] menu, and select [My Computer].

Windows 2000, Windows Me and Windows 98 SE users, double-click the [My Computer]
icon on the desktop.
4 Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select [Open].

5 Double-click the [ARCSOFT] folder or right-click it and select [Open], and double-
click the [SETUP.EXE] icon
Follow the onscreen messages to proceed with the installation.
Macintosh
1 Close all programs that are running.

2 Place the Canon Digital Camera Solution Disk in the CD-ROM drive.
3 Open the CD-ROM and double-click [ARCSOFT], followed by the [PhotoStudio
Installer] icon
Follow the onscreen messages to proceed with the installation.
4 Click [OK] when a message appears stating that the installation is complete.

Slarting ArcSefll'heleStudie '
You can start ArcSoft PhotoStudio from within ZoomBrowser EX (Windows) or ImageBrowser
(Maci ntqsh).
ZoomBrowser EX
1 Click [Edit] in the Task Area of the Main Window, followed by [Edit Image].
2 Confirm that [1. Select Images] is selected and select an image to edit.
3 Click [2. Select Editing Tool] and select [Edit with external image editor].
4 Select ArcSoft PhotoStudio from the program list and click [3. Finish].
~ If you cannot select ArcSoft PhotoStudio, register the program using the
LMJ following procedures.
1.ln Step 3 above, select [Edit with external image editor] and click
[Manage List].
2. Click [Add] and select [ArcSoft PhotoStudio].
ImageBrowser
1 Select an image to edit, click the [Edit] menu and select [ArcSoft PhotoStudio].
Mlnual for'ArcSoft I'holoSludio '

You can obtain the ArcSoft PhotoStudio manual from the ArcSoft, Inc., website. Use your
browser program to download the manual from the following URL:
http://www.arcsoft.com/support

741 Appendices
Uninstalling the Software

The procedures for uninstalling the software are only required when you wish to delete the
programs from your computer or when reinstallation is required to fix corrupted files.
Uninstalling the So.are (Windows)

Software Installed from the Canon Digital Camera Solution Disk (excluding
ArcSoft PhotoStudio)
This explanation uses ZoomBrowser EX to demonstrate how to uninstall a program. You can
remove other programs with the same procedures.
, Click the Windows [Start] menu and

select [All Programs] or [Programs],
followed by [Canon Utilities],
[Zoom Browser EX] and [ZoomBrowser
EX Uninstall].
The uninstall utility will start and remove

ZoomBrowser EX.
Uninstalling ArcSoh PhotoStudio

• Uninstall the program by clicking the [Start] menu and selecting [Control Panel] and [Add or
Remove Programs].
• With Windows 2000/Me/g8, uninstall the program by clicking the [Start] menu and selecting
[Settings] followed by [Control Panel] and [Add/Remove Programs].

Uninslalling Ihe UBB Driver cnindows)
Uninstall the USB Driver using the following procedures if you are using Windows 2000,
Windows Me or Windows 98 SE.
[j] You do not need to uninstall the USB driver with Windows XP.
For interface cable connection instructions, see the Camera User Guide.
2 Click the [Finish] button if the Camera Control Window displays.
3 Click the [Start] menu and select

[Settings], followed by [Control Panel].
4 Double-click the [Scanners and

Cameras] icon or folder.

761 Appendices
5 Delete your camera model name or

[Canon Camera] in the [Scanners and
Cameras Properties] dialog.
Windows Me users should delete their
camera model or [Canon Camera] in the
[Scanners and Cameras] folder.
Windows 2000
Select your camera model name or [Canon Camera] and click [Remove].
Windows Me
Select your camera model name or [Canon Camera], right-click the mouse and select
[Delete].
Windows 98 SE
Select your camera model name or [Canon Camera] and click [Remove]. Then turn off the
camera and remove the interface cable from the computer's USB port.
6 Click the Windows [Start] menu and select [Programs], followed by [Canon
Utilities], [Camera TWAIN Driver x.x] and [Uninstall TWAIN Driver]. A version
number appears in place of the "x.x".
• Windows 2000, Windows 98 SE: Perform Step 6 with no substitutions.
• Windows Me: Substitute the following for the underlined portions of Step 6.
[Camera WIA Driver x.x], [Uninstall WIA Driver]
The uninstall process will start.
To connect the camera to the computer and download after this point, use the following
procedures.
1. Reinstall the driver.
2. Connect the camera to the computer with the interface cable.
Uninstalling the SoftWare (Mac:intosh) .

Uninstall the programs by dragging the application's folder (the folder in which it was installed)
into the Trash, and then empty the Trash.

177
Memory Card Folder Structure
The images on a memory card are placed in the [DCIM] folder in subfolders labeled
[xxxCANON], where the IIXXXII represents a number in the range 100 - 999.
IMG_xxxx.JPG (JPEG images)

_MG_xxxx.JPG (JPEG images recorded in the
DCIM Adobe RGB color space)
xxxCANON CRW_xxxx.CRW (RAW images)
_RW_xxxx.CRW (RAW images recorded in the
Adobe RGB color space)
CRW_xxxx.THM*
STx_xxxx.JPG** (Stitch Assist mode images)
MVI_xxxx.AVI (Movies)
MVI_xxxx.THM*
SND_xxxx.WAV (Sound annotation)
The folder thatholds the settings files for

images in the DCIM folder.
CANONMSC
The folder created when DPOF settings are set.

It holds the DPOF settings files.
MISC
SDR_xxxx.WAV (Files recorded with Sound Recorder)
SNDR xxxCANON
• *Files with the THM extension are the thumbnail image files for the camera's index replay
mode.
• The IIXXXXII in file names represent four-digit numbers.
• **Each successive file shot in Stitch Assist mode is assigned a letter starting from II A," which
is inserted as the third digit in the name. i.e. [STA_0001.JPG], [STB_0002.JPG],
[STC_0003.JPG] ...
• All folders except the IIxxxCANON" folders contain image settings files. Do not open or delete
them.

7s1 Appendices
Troubleshooting
Please read this section if you encounter a problem using the software.
Investigate the foll.owing points first if you encounter a problem.
Does your computer satisfy the requirements listed in the System

Requirements section (p. 8)?
Is the camera correctly connected to the computer?
See the Camera User Guide for the correct connection procedures. Also
check to ensure that you are using the correct cable and that it is securely
attached at both ends.
Is the camera set to the playback mode? (some models only)
Some models require the camera to be set to the playback mode to

transfer data. See the Camera User Guide for details.
Is the battery sufficiently charged?
Check the battery charge if you are powering the camera with a battery.
You are recommended to use a household power source (AC adapter) to
power the camera when it is connected to a computer (if available for
your camera model).
Ploblems
Try the suggested solutions to the common problems listed below.
USB driver installation not proceeding well (Windows)
Uninstall the driver (p. 75) before reinstalling it with the procedures in Installing
the Software and USB Driver (p. 11).

Add New Hardware Wizard or New Hardware Found (Windows 2000)
Wizard displays when the camera is connected to the computer with an
interface cable.
Click [Cancel] to close the window. Temporarily disconnect the camera from the
computer. Next, read Start by Checking This on the previous page and resolve
the problem.
Images won't download into a TWAIN-compliant program (Camera and

computer connected via interface cable (Windows 2000, Windows 98 SEll.
Click the [Finish] button in the Camera Control Window to close it.
Cannot download images or shoot remotely. (For cameras connected to

the computer via an interface cable: only cameras supporting Hi-Speed
USB 2.0).
The problem may be resolved by lowering the transmission speed for data by
following the procedures below.
Solution:
Hold the MENU button on the camera down and press the ~IN' (Print/Share)
button and FUNC./SET button simultaneously. In the displayed screen, select [8]
and press the FUNC./SET button.
Camera not detected, Events dialog won't display or images will not
download to the computer (when camera is connected to the computer
via an interface cable).
Cause 1:
There is a problem with one of the items in the Start by Checking This
section (p. 78).
Solution:
Resolve the problem.
Cause 2:
The USB driver is not installed (Windows only).
Solution:
Install it with the procedures in Installing the Software and USB Driver (p. 10).
Cause 3:
The USB driver is not correctly installed (Windows only).
Solution:
Uninstall the driver (p. 75) before reinstalling it with the procedures in Installing
the Software and USB Driver (p. 11).

80 I Appendices
Cause 4:
The camera may have been recognized as another device under the
following circumstances (Windows only).
• The camera was connected to the computer before the USB driver was
installed.
• The [Scanners and Cameras] icon or the [Scanners and Cameras] folder cannot
be found in the [Control Panel] or the [Printers and Other Hardware] window.
• Your camera model name, [Canon Camera] or a camera icon does not display
in the [Scanners and Cameras Properties] dialog or the [Scanners and
Cameras] folder.
Solution 1:
Start with the following procedures.
Install the USB driver with the procedures in Installing the Software and USB
Driver (p. 11). Then connect the camera to the computer with the interface
cable and prepare it to transfer data. If the USB driver is already installed,
uninstall it first and then reinstall it.
Solution 2:
If the problem is not resolved with the procedures in Solution 1, continue by
implementing the following procedures. The specific steps are explained below.
1. Check to see if the camera is being recognized as an "other" device.
2. Delete the driver and the setup information files if it is being recognized as an
"other" device.
3. Reinstall the driver.
This section explains the specific steps for each operating system.
Windows XP and Windows 2000
Check to see if the camera is being recognized as an "other" device and

delete the driver if it is.
1. Windows XP: Click the [Start] menu, followed by [Control Panel],

[Performance and Maintenance] and [System].
Windows 2000: Click the [Start] menu and select [Settings] and [Control
Panel]. Double-click the [System] icon.
2. Click the [Hardware] tab, followed by [Device Manager].

3. Click the l±I symbol beside the [Other devices] and/or [Imaging devices]
category. Your camera model name or [Canon Camera] will display in these
categories if it is being recognized as an lIotherll device.
There are other potential reasons for the problem if the "Other devices"
or "Imaging devices" categories do not appear or your camera model
name or [Canon Camera] does not appear. Proceed to Step 6,
temporarily quit the procedures and investigate the other potential
causes.
4. Select your camera model name or [Canon Camera], right-click and select
[Delete].
5. Click [OK] in the confirmation dialog.
Delete all instances of your camera model name or [Canon Camera] if it
appears in one or more places in the [Other devices] or [Imaging devices]
categories.
6. Close the System Properties window.
lil Step 7 and above are not required for Windows XP.
Delete the setup information files
7. Double-click the [My Computer] icon on the desktop, followed by the [C:]
drive, [WINNT] folder and [inf] folder.

821 Appendices
It the lint] Folder Is Not Visible in the [WIN NT] Folder

Use the following procedures to show all files and folders.
1. Open the [WIN NT] folder.

2. Click the [Tools] menu and select [Folder Options].
3. Click the [View] tab.
4. In the [Files and Folders] category in the Advanced Settings section, set [Hidden files
and folders] to [Show hidden files and folders]. Remove the check marks from [Hide
file extensions for known file types] if it is present.
5. Click [OK] to close the dialog.
This will make the hidden files and folders visible.
8. Look for files for Canon digital cameras that start with [CAP*].
The" *" represents a number, such as 0 or 1.
[CAP*] files come in pairs of [CAP*.inf] and [CAP*.pnf] files (For example,
[CAPO.inf] and [CAPO.pnfD.
9. Double-click the [CAP*] files to check their contents.
Double-clicking a [CAP*.inf] file will open itin the Windows Notepad
program. Look for [;****Canon Camera Driver Setup File****] in the first
line. Note down the names of these files.
10. Delete the [CAP*] file set.

Delete the [CAP* .inf] and [CAP* .pnf] file for Canon digital cameras that you
noted down in Step 9.

Reinstall the driver.
11. Reinstall the driver with the procedures in Installing the Software and USB
Driver (p. 11).
Windows Me/Windows 98 SE
Check to see if the camera is being recognized as an Ilother" device and
delete the driver if it is.
1. Click the [Start] menu and select [Settings], followed by [Control Panel].
Double-click the [System] icon.
This will display the System Properties window.
2. Click the [Device Manager] tab.
3. Click the I±l symbol beside the [Other devices] and/or [Imaging devices]
category. Your camera model name or [Canon Camera] will display in these
categories if it is being recognized as an other/l device.
/I
There are other potential reasons for the problem if the /lOther devices"
or "Imaging devices" categories do not appear or your camera model
name or [Canon Camera] does not appear. Proceed to Step 6,
temporarily quit the procedures. and investigate the other potential
causes.
4. Select your camera model name or [Canon Camera] and click [Remove].
5. Click [OK] in the confirmation dialog.
Delete all instances of your camera model name or [Canon Camera] if it
appears in one or more places in the [Other devices] or [Imaging devices]
categories.
6. Click [OK] to close the System Properties window.
Delete the setup information files.
7. Double-click the [My Computer] icon on the desktop, followed by the [C:]
drive, [WINDOWS] or [Windows] folder and [INF] or [Inf] folder.

841 Appendices
If the [lNF] Folder Is Not Visible in the [WINDOWS] Folder

Use the following procedures to show all files and folders.
1. Windows 98 SE: Click the [View] menu and select [Folder Options].
Windows Me: Click the [Tools] menu and select [Folder Options].
2. Click the [View] tab.
3. Windows 98 SE: Set the [Hide files] section to [Show all files].
Windows Me: Set the [Hidden files and folders] section to [Show hidden files and
folders].
4. Click [OK] to close the dialog.
This will make the hidden files and folders visible.
8. Find and delete the [DRVDATA.BIN] (or [Drvdata.binD and [DRVIDX.BIN] (or
[Drvidx.binD files.
9. In the [INF] or [Inf] folder, double-click the [OTHER] or [Other] folder to open
it.
10. Find and delete the [Canon.lncCAP xxx.lnf] file (The xxx
represents numerals.).
You do not need to delete anything if none of the above files are
contained in the [OTHER] folder.

I 85
Reinstall the driver
11.Reinstall the driver with the procedures in Installing the Software and USB
Driver (p. 11).
looming Images in loomBlowser EX is Slow 01 Not.olking'

Some graphics cards or settings may cause the display of zoomed images in Zoom Browser EX
to slow down or malfunction. If this occurs, set your computer display's Hardware acceleration
setting to a lower setting.
1. Click the Windows [Start] menu, followed by [Control Panel] and

[App-earance and Themes].
With Windows 2000, Windows Me, or Windows 98 SE, click the [Start] menu
and select [Settings], followed by [Control Panel].
2. Click the [Display] icon, followed by the [Settings] tab, [Advanced] button and
[Troubleshoot] tab.
With Windows 2000, click the [Display] icon, followed by the [Settings] tab,
[Advanced] button and [Troubleshoot] tab.
With Windows Me or Windows 98 SE, click the [Display] icon, followed by
the [Settings] tab, [Advanced] button and [Performance] tab.
3. Set the [Hardware acceleration] to a setting below [Full] and click [OK].
4. Restart the computer if prompted.
If You Were Using ZoomBrowser EX Version 2 or 3

Take the following steps if you were using ZoomBrowser EX version 2 or 3 with Windows.
If Titles and Comments Were Attached to Your Images.

Take the following steps to display in version 5 the titles and comments you
input in version 2/3.
1. Use Windows Explorer to open the [Program] folder within the folder in
which you installed ZoomBrowser EX 5.
(e.g. C:\Program Files\Canon\ZoomBrowser Ex\Program)
2. Double-click [dbconverter.exe] found in this folder to start this utility.
3. Select the database file you were using up to this point and click the [Start]
button.
(e.g. C:\Program Files\Canon\ZoomBrowser EX\Database\My Database.zbd)
This will display the titles and comments input in the earlier versions in the
comments section of ZoomBrowser EX 5.
If You Had Images in a Folder Below the Program Files Folder

Image files in the [Program Files] folder or a subfolder cannot be displayed in
ZoomBrowser EX 5 from that location. To display these files, first perform steps
1-3 above and then carryon with Step 4.

861 Appendices
4. Use Windows Explorer to copy the folder and the images it contains from the
[Program Files] folder to another folder.
(e.g. Copy the image folders in C:\Program Files\Canon\ZoomBrowser
EX\Library One to another location.)
The moved folder images can now be selected and displayed with
ZoomBrowser EX 5.

The software package and the procedures for connecting to a computer and preparing for data
transfers vary between camera models. Certain software functions may also not be supported
by some camera models.
Non-Supported Programs and Features

IppliEatile Camera lIodels
Power5hot 5D700 15 DIGITAL ELPH/DIGITAL IXU5 800 IS
Power5hot 5D630 DIGITAL ELPH/DIGITAL IXU5 65
Power5hot 50600 DIGITAL ELPH/DIGITAL IXUS 60
PowerShot A700
PowerShot A540
Power5hot A530
Power5hot A430
Power5hot A420
Non-Supported Functions
-The camera does not record RAW images.
-The camera does not support the Display AF Frame function in the View
Window.
-The camera shutter cannot be controlled from a computer.
-The camera does not support the 50und Recorder function.
IppliEable Camera lIodels

Power5hot 53 IS
Non-Supported Functions
-The camera does not record RAW images.
-The camera does not support the Display AF Frame function in the View
Window.

881 Index
F
Index Favorite Folder
Macintosh 53
A Windows 25
File Information Window 57
Adobe Reader (Adobe Acrobat Reader) 2 Folders Area 24, 25
ArcSoft PhotoStudio 72 Function Buttons 24, 27
B
Browser Area Image Icon Attribute
Macintosh 52, 53 Macintosh 53
Windows 24, 25 Windows 25
Browser Window 52 ImageBrowser 6, 7, 9
Index Print
c Windows
Information about Your Camera
21
87
Camera Control Window Installer Panel
Macintosh 46, 48 Macintosh 44
Canon Digital Camera Solution Disk 9 Installing Software
Macintosh 44 Macintosh 44
Windows 11 USB Driver 11
Comment Windows 11
Macintosh 57
Windows 29 K
Computer 8
Connecting to a computer 10 Keyword
Maci ntosh 46 Macintosh 57
Control Pane!. 52, 55, 58
L
D
Layout Print
DIGITAL IXUS 60 87 Macintosh 50
DIGITAL IXUS 65 87
DIGITAL IXUS 800 IS 87 M
Direct Transfer Function 18, 47
Display Control Panel Main Window 24
Macintosh 52, 55 Memory Card Folder Structure 77
Windows 24, 27 Memory Card Reader
Display Mode Macintosh 48
Macintosh 52, 54 Windows 19
Windows 24, 26 Merging Panoramic Images
Downloading Images Macintosh 66
Macintosh 46 Windows 38
Windows 16 My Camera Maker 42
My Camera Settings
E Macintosh 67
Windows 39
Easy-PhotoPrint 21
E-mail 7
Events Dialog 17, 79
Extract Stills from Movies 7

89
o Star Rating
Macintosh 55 56, 57
One Photo per Page Print Windows 27~ 28, 29
Macintosh 50 Stitch Assist Mode
Windows 21 Macintosh 66
Operating the Shutter Remotely 7 Windows 38
System Requirements 8
Macintosh 63
Windows 35
T
p
Task Area 24, 25, 30
PDF Manuals 2 Troubleshooting 78
PhotoStitch 6 Start by Checking This 78
M aci ntosh
Windows
66
38 u
PhotoStudio 72
PowerShot A420 87 Uninstalling Software
PowerShot A430 87 Macintosh 76
PowerShot A530 87 Windows 74
PowerShot A540 87 USB Driver
Uninstalling 75
PowerShot A700 87
USB Driver (TWAINIWIA Driver) 9, 13
PowerShot S3 IS 87
PowerShot SD600 DIGITAL ELPH
PowerShot SD630 DIGITAL ELPH
87
87
v
PowerShot SD700 IS DIGITAL ELPH 87 Viewer Window
Print/Share button 18, 47 Macintosh 56, 61
Printing Images Windows 28
Macintosh 50
Windows
Programs and Compatible Operating Systems
21
9
z
Properties Window 29 ZoomBrowser EX 7, 9
Version 2/3 85
Q
QuickTime
Windows 33
R
Remote Shooting
Macintosh 63
Windows 35
Replaying Movies
Macintosh 61
Windows 33
s
Searching Images
Macintosh 59
Windows 30
Shooting Information
Macintosh 57
Windows 29

90 I
MEMO

Canon Customer Support
For Canon Customer Support contacts, please see the Canon Customer Support leaflet
supplied with your camera.
ArcSoft Customer Support

North America
46601 Fremont Blvd., Fremont, CA 94538
Tel: (510) 440-9901 (Mon. - Fri., 8:30 AM - 5:30 PM PST)
E-mail: support@arcsoft.com
Other Regions
Please see the ArcSoft web site: http://www.arcsoft.com/maininternational.html.

Canon
CDI-E233-01 D 0406C H154.5 © 2006 CANON INC. PRINTED IN JAPAN

Canon
Direct Print User Guide
Guia del usuario de impresi6n directa
You don't even need a computer I

Just connect your camera to your printer and print
Ni siquiera necesita un ordenador.
Simplemente conecte la camara a la impresora e imprima
f(
PictBridge
.....
ExitPrint
t"j ~
DPOF DIRECT
rJ
BUBBLE JET
PRINT D1REO

t:.NuLI~H
Introduction
-Confirm Your Printer Model and the Section that Applies to You
Operations differ according to your printer model.

According to the procedure below, confirm the section and page
you should read in this user guide.
D Connect the camera to the printer with an appropriate cable

and confirm the icon displayed in the camera's LCD monitor.
• For instructions on camera and printer connection methods,
please refer to page 8.
• If one of the aforementioned icons does not appear, the connected printer
cannot be used .
• When the printer is ready for printing. the ~oN' button lights in blue. The
r!1oN' button blinks during printing.

£II Confirm your printer £tI Read the page
~model. 1:11 below.
Page 10
SELPHY CP liD Printing with SELPHY CP
series Series Printers using
ll
PictBridge
Page 32
PIXMAI
SELPHY OS
II D
Printing with Bubble Jet
Printers (PIXMA series/
series SELPHY OS series) using
ll
PictBridge
Page 52
Non-Canon
printers* II D
Printing with Non-Canon,
ll
PictBridge Compliant Printers
Page 53
SELPHY CP
series
II m
Printing with SELPHY CP
Series Printers using Canon
Direct Prinf'
Page 71
Bubble Jet II L!j Printing with Bubble Jet
printers Printers using Bubble Jet
Direcf'
* Please also refer to the user guide that came with your printer.
1
For the latest information regarding connections between Canon
printers and cameras, please refer to the following URL:
http://web.canon.jp/lmaging/BeBit-e.html
http://www.canon.com/pictbridge/
PictBridge Compliance
This camera complies with the industry standard "PictBridge"*.
This allows you to also connect your camera to non-Canon
PictBridge compliant printers and print images with simple
operations using the camera buttons.
* PictBridge: PictBridge is an industry standard for direct printing that
allows you to print images without using a computer by directly
connecting digital cameras and digital camcorders (hereafter "camera")
to a printer, regardless of the devices' brand and model.
Trademark Acknowledgements
• Names and products in this guide may be registered trademarks or
trademarks of their respective companies.
• Copyright © 2005 Canon Inc. All rights reserved.
2
Table of Contents
Direct Print 6
Allows for Printing without the Use of a Computer 6
Various Printing Operations Can Be Performed 6
You Can Also Perform the Following Printing Operations ..7
Printing Movies (Movie Print) 7
Printing Multiple Images on a Sheet of Paper 7
10 Photo Print. 7
Connecting the Camera to the Printer 8
Disconnecting the Camera and the Printer 9
P2J Printing with SELPHY CP Series Printers using PictBridge 10
Printing 10
Easy Print. 10
Print after Changing the Print Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11
Selecting Print Settings 13
Setting the Date and the File Number Printing Option. . . . 13
Setting the Print Effect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Setting the Number of Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 14
Setting the Printing Area (Trimming) 15
Selecting the Paper Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Printing Multiple Images on a Sheet of Paper 21
Printing by Specifying the Print Size
(10 Photo Print) 22
Printing Images in the Fixed Size 24
Single-frame 25
Sequence-frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Specifying and Printing Multiple Images
(Setting the DPOF Print Settings) 28
list of Messages 31
3
P2I Printing with Bubble Jet Printers (PIXMA series!
SELPHY OS series) using PictBridge 32
Printing 32
Easy Print 32
Print after Changing the Print Settings 33
Setting the Date and the File Number Printing Option .. 35
Setting the Print Effect. 36
Setting the Number of Copies 37
Selecting the Paper Settings .42
Printing Multiple Images on a Sheet of Paper. .44
Printing Movies (Movie Print) .46
(Setting the DPOF Print Settings).................•.47
List of Messages 50
P2I Printing with Non-Canon, PictBridge Compliant Printers 52

Printing 52
m Printing with SELPHY CP Series Printers using

Canon Direct Print 53
If you use Canon Compact Photo Printer SELPHY
CP71 0/CP51 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 53
Printing 53
Easy Print 53
Print after Changing the Print Settings 54
Setting the Number of Copies 55
Setting the Print Style (Image, Borders and Date) 55
Printing by Specifying the Print Size (10 Photo Print) 61
Single-frame 64
Sequence-frame 65
Specifying and Printing MUltiple Images
(Setting the DPOF Print Settings) 67
4 List of Messages 70

L!j Printing with Bubble Jet Printers using Bubble Jet Direct . . 71
Printing .............................•.•....... 71
Setting the Print Style .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Settings that Can Be Set with the Camera ..............•.. 74

rzJSELPHY CP Series Printers using PictBridge 74
rzJBubble Jet Printers (PIXMA series/SELPHY OS series)
using PictBridge 75
[!;lSELPHY CP Series Printers using Canon Direct Print
[!j Bubble Jet Printers using Bubble Jet Direct. . . . . . . 77
5
Direct Print
Allows for Printing without the Use of a Computer
Connect your camera to the printer with the appropriate cable.
Image selection and printing is operated from the camera.
Various Printing Operations Can Be Performed*

, - - - - - - - ' - - - Prints to cover the entire
surface of thepaper.
Or, prints with aborder.
Add the date.
Specify which portion of

the image to print.
(Trimming)
Multiple pictures can be printedat once. (DPOFprint setting) J

* Some settings may not be selectable for Non-Canon printers.
6
You Can Also Perform the Following Printing Operations
You can printa single frame ofmovies or

extractmovieframes aUairly regularintervals
and printthem on asingle sheet of paper
(p. 25, p.46, or p. 64».
CanonSELPHYCP Series Printers, Printers using

pictBridge (Including non-Canon. printers)
Sequence-frame: .CanonSELPHYCPSeries Printers
Compositions of multiple images you specify

ofthesarnedimensionscan be printed ona
singlesheetofpaper(p.21 or p. 44).
Moreover, the DPOF print setting* function
aHowsyou to. separately print . different
images by specifyingthenumber offrames
tobeprintedper image.
Animage can betrimmed, laid out and printed

as 10 photos(p.22or p. 61).
• Capable printers: Canon SELPHYCPSeries

Printers
Depending on the printer model, additional printing operations are available

as follows:
• Printing images in a fixed size (p. 24)
• Printing images with the shooting information (p. 43)
* DPOF print settings
This function allows you to preset the images and the number of copies using
the camera button controls. The settings are recorded to a memory card.
Please refer to the Camera User Guide for instructions on setting procedure.
This gUide explains how to print images with DPOF print settings.
DPOF=Digital Print Order Format 7
Connecting the Camera to the
Printer
Connect the camera to the printer. For instructions on printer and
camera operation methods, refer to their respective user guides.
D Set one of the following into the camera.

• Compact power adapter (sold separately)
• Fully charged battery
• New batteries
EJ Place paper, ink cassette/cartridge, etc. into the

printer.
II Connect the camera to the printer with the
appropriate interface cable supplied with the camera.
DIGITAL terminal
~ ~--
~
~/ Camera: Connect the cable to
the DIGITAL terminal.
Printer: Refer to the printer's
user guide.
This illustration shows the PowerShot SD600 DIGITAL ELPHI

DIGITAL IXUS 60 as an example.
Some printers require specific connection cables which differ

from the above cable. Please refer to the printer's user guide.
D Turn the printer's power on.

B Set the camera to Playback mode and turn the
power on.
Depending on the camera model, the camera's power will
automatically turn on when the printer's power is turned on.
The folloWing operations are not available during a camera/printer
connection .
• Language settings that use the SET button and the JUMP button
(Depending on the camera model, use the SET button and the
MENU button).
8 • Resetting the camera's settings to default.

Disconnecting the Camera and the
Printer
a Detach the cable from the printer.
Pull out the cable while holding the connector plug. Do not
pull out by the cable.
D Turn the camera's power off.

II Detach the cable from the camera.
Pull out the cable while holding the connector plug. Do not
pull out by the cable.
9
D Printing with SELPHY
CP Series Printers using
PictBridge
Printing
Easy Print
You can print images by pressing only one button after connecting
the camera to the printer.
Make sure that D displays"in'~
the upper left corner of the
LCD monitor.
Display the images you wish to print and press the

ddJltV button.
If you wish to change the print settings, see Print after
Changing the Print Settings (p. 11).
10
Print after Changing the Print Settings
You can change the print settings before printing.
Make su're"~ihat""m""di's'piays"'i'n"
LCD monitor.
If ~ displays on the LCD monitor,
please refer to ~ Printing with
SELPHY CP Series Printers using
Canon Direct Print (p. 53).
Display the images you wish

to print and press the SET
button.
The print order screen appears.
II
Depending on the printer model,
some setting options may not
display.
Sets the number of copies (p. 14)

Sets the trimming portion (p. 15)
Sets the paper size, type and layout
(p.19)
ct print settings as nelea~ea.
Select [Print] and press the SET button.

• The image will start to print and, when it is completely
finished, the display will revert to the standard playback
mode.
• If you press the MENU button, the display will revert to the
standard playback mode and will not take place.
11
Cancel Printing
• To cancel printing between images, press the SET button.
A confirmation dialog will display. Select [OK] and press the
SET button. The printer will stop printing the current image and
eject the paper.
Printing Errors
• An error message appears if an error occurs for some reason
during the printing process. When the error is resolved, printing
will automatically resume. If printing does not resume, select
[Continue] and press the SET button. If [Continue] cannot be
selected, select [Stop], press the SET button and restart the
print job. See List of Messages (p. 31) for details.
12
Selecting Print Settings
tDeF>er'}(:lirl~ 0n fAe camera mOGel, tAa soreams fAat will be

GisJ:)la}'eCl will \liat'l. ~Iease als<:> re~er to ~Ie t2lser €}lUieie ~l"1at oame
witt:) }'0lU[ J:)rirl~er.
Default Setting
• The Default oJ:)tion is a fixeei settin~ of the J:)rinter.
• The [Date/File No.], [Print Effeot], J:)aJ:)er settin~ [Paper Size],
[PaJ:)er T}'pe] anG [Pa~e La}'out] options are available.
Setting the Date and the File Number Printing

Option
II
Select [Rl, then select the
date and the file number
printing option.
You can set the eiate and the file
number printin~ as follows:
Date Prints only the date.
File No. Prints only the file number.
Prints both the date and the
Both
file number.
Prints neither date nor file
Off
number.
Prints using the default
Default
setting.
13

Setting the Print Effect
This function uses the camera's shooting information to optimize
the image data, yielding high quality prints. You can select the
following print effects.
Uses the camera's shooting information to deliver optimum
On
prints.
Off Prints without any effects.
Default Print settings differ according to your printer model.
Select [e] and choose a

print effect option.
Setting the Number of Copies

o''''''S'eIect'''fijjT'anwd'''sei'th'e''',"'~~'''~'''~'''~'MM~'
number of prints.
1 to 99 copies can be set.
14

Setting the Printing Area (Trimming)
You can specify a portion of the image for printing.
Please set [Paper Settings] (p. 19) before setting the trimming
settings. If [Paper Settings] is changed after having made the
trimming settings, you must select the settings again .
.. Steps 2b and 3b
* Proceed to procedure ED or depending

on the display screen which appears.
15

Trim the image.
Changing the Size of the Trimming Frame
• Press the zoom lever or the zoom button to adjust the size of
the trimming frame.
• The trimming frame can be changed to a minimum selection
of approximately half the displayed image (in width and
height) or a maximum selection that is virtually the same size
as the image.
• Expanding the trimming frame beyond its maximum size
cancels the trimming setting.
• When printing an image that has been magnified using the
trimming option, the image quality may become coarser and
grainier depending on the level of magnification.
Moving the Trimming Frame
• Move the trimming frame using the omni selector or the up,
down, right and left buttons.
Rotating the Trimming Frame
• You can rotate the trimming frame by pressing the DISP. (or
DISPLAY) button.
.;};o'...,»',;,,:·::::.;.:<:::.;·:·/.0;;;:.:'.;',:-;
,"·~,·.:-;,;~,~:~:v~;:,;-:'":-;~.~,~,~,,:·«·;,:·::,,,,:.~<,/.-~;:,;.'.~:{';~''l..:,:.:.;.:" ..,,;';Y/,,~ ....;·:,;:.:·:...~;':':;-'':':'.;.'/, ...·~·;.:'.:-'p::%.;·:.;:.;.:.;:.; ....::<.;.;.'.z·;.:::~1 ..;:;-..1.·::%·;-:::;.:(::;.;-:(";.'':":-;.''';<';':'.-.,;.:·;<.;",::.,:.;z../,::;.;I.(;:":'·:;.;·y.:/.-,,,,·:.:·;·;.',:.;.'/,;.:.;'_;:'..:..;.;.:·::';..... -:;;:,:-;:">:"",;.'.:':,,,',;.:.;r.,·;';':;';':-'.'Y/.::;·;':';::';';-""/.·:';:-" 'l.;,:<,;~,;«:%«,< ....:-:.;,y,WN/':';-:'..',
Press the SET button to close the setting menu.

Pressing the MENU button cancels the settings.
16

Trim the image.
• Press the up and down buttons to adjust the size of the
trimming frame.
III
as the image.
• You can rotate the trimming frame using the left and right
buttons.
• Press the SET button and use the up, down, right and left
buttons to move the trimming frame. Pressing the SET
button again allows you to change the size of the frame and
to rotate it.
Press the MENU button,
select [OK] and press the
SET button.
Selecting [Cancel setting] cancels
the selected trimming setting. If
[Edit] is selected, the display
returns to the previous screen.
17

• The paper size and page layout settings determine the shape of
the trimming frame.
• Please use the LCD monitor to set the trimming settings. The
trimming frame may not display correctly on a TV screen.
18

Selecting the Paper Settings
"'#·'"·.'·.'''''''''''''W''k''X·WM''''~''''''''·'hX""·",·."",,,,'''MM.""·,,",,·,,,,,,,.,,',,,·,,".,,,,,.·w,,,,,",'·"·'·'·"'''·h'''·»,,·,,,,,,,;,"'''''.''''h'''·.'M".m.",,,."·,,.''''''''''''''''''h.'''.'",,'''·'"'N,
.•",««,WM'~'''''''"'''''""w''#.''m''''''''''''''''''''"'''','''k,,,'w,,.,',,,.'
Select [Paper Settings] and

The paper size setting screen
appears.
Select a paper size and press

the SET button.
The default settings and specified
paper cassette size are displayed.
II
The paper type setting screen
appears.
* Paper sizes vary according to region.
Press the SET button.

The page layout screen appears.
19

","",,,",__ •.,",,,w,,,,,,,,,,,,",,,=.w*,,,,,W"w.w=o_
.~~_,,,,,,,,",,,,,,,,,,w_-.._,,,_,,,,,,,,,"*"_,,,,,,w=,,w,,_=,,,,,,#,,,,,,_,,r>,,,,~,,,,=_-=,w,=_.w""""".w",.",.w,,.
Select a layout.
The following layout can be
selected.
Default Print settings differ
according to your printer
model.
Bordered Prints with a border.
Borderless Prints right to the edges
of the paper.
N-up Prints 2, 4 or (8*) images
on a single sheet of paper
(p.21)
ID Photo Specifies the print size
and print portion of an
image or a whole image
as an ID photo (p. 22)
Fixed Size Prints by specifying the
print size of the image on
a sheet of paper (p. 24).
* Credit card size paper only
20
Printing Multiple Images on a Sheet of Paper
Selecting [N-up] in the layout setting (p. 20) will allow you to
specify the following layout settings.
2 images (height 2 x width 1) of the same dimensions are
2
arranged on a single sheet of paper.
4
arranged on a single sheet of paper.
8*
arranged on a single sheet of paper or a label sheet.
* This option can only be selected when printing on credit card size
paper.
[Printing example 1] Printing 3 copies of image A in 2-up
Number of Image A:
III
copies (p. 14) [3] copies
Layout 2 0 0 ,---------.
0
I I
I I
I I
I I
I
1 ______ ---..1 I
DPOF print setting (p. 28) allows you to separately print different
images by specifying the number of frames to be printed per image.
[Printing example 2] Printing 2 copies of image A and 1 copy of image
Bin 4-up
DPOF print Image A:

settings*
(p.28)
[2] copies
Image B:
[1] copies
0 0
[!] i-------i
Layout 4
1- _ _ _ _ _ _ ..!
* Please refer to the Camera User Guide for instructions on DPOF print
setting method.
21

Printing by Specifying the Print Size (10 Photo Print)
Selecting [ID Photo] in the layout setting (p. 20) will allow you
to specify the print size and print portion of an image or a
whole image as an ID photo*.
* Images printed with the ID Photo Print function may not be allowed
as a formal certificate photo. Refer to the party (organization) or
administration requiring the photo.
Select [10 Photo], then press

the SET button.
T
Specify the print size by
selecting the length of the
long side and the short side,
then press the SET button.
Specify the size by selecting the
length of the long side first, then
the short side. See the next table
for selectable combinations of the
long side length and the short side
length.
22
• Selectable combination
. .: Available print size
Short Side
(J)
"'C
U5
0)
oc: ~~-+---r----+---+----
....J
Trim the image to specify the

print area.
See Step 2 of Setting the Printing
Area (Trimming) (p. 16 and p. 17)
on how to trim the image.
The trimming setting screen differs

depending on the camera model.
Follow the steps according to the
screen that displays on your
camera.
• The shape of the trimming frame varies depending on the

specified print size.
• Use the LCD monitor to specify the print size settings. The
23

Printing Images in the Fixed Size
Selecting [Fixed Size] in the layout setting (p. 20) will allow
you to print by specifying the print size of the image on a
sheet of paper.
Select the fixed print size
required.
Depending on the paper size, you
can select print sizes as follows:
Paper size Print size
Credit Card You cannot select
the print size.
9)( 13 em 89 mm x 55 mm
(Lsize) Default
10)( 14.8 em 7 em x 10 em
(Postcard size) Default
4 in. )( 8 in.1 4 in. x 6 in.
10)( 20 em 7 em x 10 em
(Wide size) Default
Select a layout and press the SET button. This

ends the paper settings operations.
The display returns to the print order screen.
24
Printing Movies (Movie Print)
Select the movie you want to
print, then press the SET
button.
The movie control panel appears.
Single-frame
You can choose a single frame from a movie and print it on a sheet
of paper.
II
Display the frame you wish
to print on the LCD monitor,
select m{Print), then press
the SET button.
Refer to Viewing Movies section of
the Camera User Guide on how to
display the movie frame you wish
to print.
Select . , and choose
[Single].
Select II
and set the
number of prints.

Sequence-frame
You can print movie frames selected automatically at fairly regular
intervals on a sheet of paper.
""'M""-.~""-W'M"«"W'""""""'''''''<'S'efeci''-'''m'''w{'i;''r'i'ntr"a'nwd'''press''-'MM'~
the SET button.
If necessary, select [On],

[Off] or [Default] in II
(Caption).
If you set ai (Caption) to [On], you
can print the file number and the
elapsed time of the frame at the
same time.
26
• If you press the ~¢V' button instead of the SET button in Step
1, movie print begins.
• The number of printed movie frames per sheet of paper with
[Sequence] is determined by the paper size shown as follows:
(Depending on the number of seconds in the movie, there are
cases when the number of frames indicated below will not be
printed.)
• Credit card size: 20 frames
• L size: 42 frames
• Postcard size: 63 frames
• Wide size: 84 frames
• Selecting [Paper Settings] and pressing the SET button in Step
4 will allow [Paper Size], [Paper Type], and [Page Layout] •
(excluding [10 Photo]) to be selected.
However, [Page Layout] cannot be set (p. 26) when [Sequence]
is selected.
27
(Setting the DPOF Print Settings)
With the camera's B(Print) menu, you can specify and print
multiple images or all the images on a memory card. For
instructions on how to specify images, please refer to Setting the
DPOF Print Settings section of the Camera User Guide. In this
section, we will explain how to print images after specifying them.
In the lEft (Pri'ntf'me'n"u'~"sei'e'ct"

[Print] and press the SET
button.
• When an image or images have
been specified (see the Camera
User Guide), the ~lN' button will
light up blue. At this time, if you
press the ~lN' button, the
screen for Step 2 will be displayed.
""_,xw",~~"".w,,,,_."·,,,,,,,.,,.·,,,,,,,,,.,,,,,,,,,,,"_0"'.x""",,,,,,,.,,,,,,,,,,.,'.,·,,,.',.',"""",,,,,,,,,'.,.""",,,,,,,,,,,·»,"'.,,*,·,,·,,·,,,,,,,,,,,W."'·''''''''·'·'',,,,,,'''·'·'·»''''''.·'"'''W'''''"''''W''''''.'=W"''''''''·'''·''''W.'.• ,,,,,'."»"'' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' '#.',>,,,,,,,.,,,,,,,,,,",,.,,.,,,.,
Set the print effect and paper
settings as required.
Sets the Print Effect (p. 14)
Selects the Paper Settings* (p. 19)
* [Page Layout] cannot be set in the

[Paper Settings] when [Index] is
selected in the [Print Settings] option
in Step 1.
[Print] and press the

SET button.
• The image will start to print and,
when it is completely finished, the
display will revert to the standard
playback mode.
• If the MENU button is pressed,
the display will revert to the
screen in Step 1 and printing will
not take place.
28
• The maximum number of images printed on one page in the
Index print type depends on the selected paper size.
• Credit card size: 20 images
• L size: 42 images
• Postcard size: 63 images
• Wide size: 84 images
III
29
Cancel Printing
• To cancel printing between images printed, press the SET
button. A confirmation dialog appears. Select [OK] and press
the SET button. The printer will stop printing the current image
and eject the paper.
Restarting Printing
• Select [Resume] and press the SET button. The remaining
images can be printed.
• Printing cannot be restarted under the following circumstances.
• If the print settings have been changed before restarting.
• If the image for which the print settings were set has been
deleted before restarting.
• If there is very little free space on the memory card when
printing is canceled, it may not be possible to restart printing.
• If printing is canceled because the camera battery is depleted, it
may not be possible to restart printing.
(Replace with a fully charged battery pack or new batteries,
then turn the camera power on again. If you intend to use an
extended period of time, you are recommended to power the
camera with a compact power adapter (sold separately).)
Printing Errors
30
List of Messages
The following messages may appear on the camera's LCD monitor
when an error occurs during a camera and printer connection.
(Depending on the printer model, some messages may not
display.)
Please refer to the printer's user guide for solutions.
Paper cassette is incorrectly inserted or out of
No Paper
paper. Or the paper feed is not operating correctly.
The ink cartridge has not been inserted o"r has run
No Ink
out of ink.
Paper and ink do not The paper and ink are from different sets.
match
_p_a_p_e_r_J_a_m
Paper Error
T_h_e_p~a-p-e-r-ja-m-m-e-d-d-u-ri_ng_p_rin_t_in_g_.
The paper is not correctly set in the printer.
111
Ink Error The ink casette is experiencing a problem.
Recharge the printer The printer's battery pack is depleted.
battery
You attempted to print the image with a different
Readjust trimming style than the one used when the trimming settings
were set.
Check whether or not an error other than a paper
Hardware Error
or ink error has occurred.
You tried to print an image that is not compatible
with PictBridge. Some images that have been
File Error
recorded with another camera or modified using a
computer cannot be printed.
There is an error in the settings. Turn off the printer
Print error and turn it on again, then set the print settings
correctly.
31
P2J Printing with
Bubble Jet Printers
(PIXMA seriesl
SELPHY DS series)
using PictBridge
Printing
Easy Print
Make"Wsure'thai""m""d'i's'pTays~Yn"<
LCD monitor.

~1tV' button.
Changing the Print Settings (p. 33).
32
Make sure that D~displays in"
LCD monitor.
Ifm displays on the LCD monitor,
please refer to m Printing with
Bubble Jet Printers using Bubble
Jet Direct (p. 71).

button.
Depending on the printer model,
•
some setting options may not
display.
Sets the number of copies (p. 37)

Sets the trimming portion (p. 38)
Sets the paper size, type and layout
(p.42)
print settings as needed.

• The image will start to print and, when it is completely
finished, the display will revert to the standard playback
mode.
• If you press the MENU button, the display will revert to the
standard playback mode and printing will not take place.
33

Cancel Printing
• To cancel printing between images, press the SET button.
A confirmation dialog will display. Select [OK] and press the
SET button. The printer will stop printing the current image and
eject the paper.
Printing Errors
• On printers equipped with an operation panel, an error number
or message displays on the panel. Please refer to the printer
user guide for the remedies corresponding to the error numbers
or messages.
34

Default Setting
• The Default option is a fixed setting of the printer.
• The [Date/File No.], [Print Effect], paper setting [Paper Size],
[Paper Type] and [Page Layout] options are available.
• On printers equipped with an operation panel, you can change
the settings for those items set to [Default] using the printer's
operation panel.
• The setting contents of the Default option differ depending on
the printer model. For details, please refer to the printer user
guide.
Setting the Date and the File Number Printing Option

"se'i'ect'I.I:"thenselectt'he
date and the file number
printing option.
You can set the date and the file
number printing as follows:
Date Prints the date.
File No. Prints only the file number.
Prints both the date and
Both
the file number.
Prints neither date nor file
Off
number.
Prints using the default
Default
setting.
35
Setting the Print Effect
This function uses the camera's shooting information to optimize
the image data, yielding high quality prints. You can select the
following print effects.
Uses the camera's shooting information to deliver optimum
On
prints.
Off Prints without any effects.
Prints more vibrant colors, such as the green of trees or the
Vivid
blue of the sea or sky, than the [On] option.
NR Prints with a noise reduction effect.
Vivid+NR Prints using both the [Vivid] and [NR] options.
Brightly prints a person's face that has become dark because of
Face~
backlighting, etc.
Default Print settings differ according to your printer model.
Select [e] and choose a

print effect option.
36

'"'_'''"m_''''''''''''''''''''"",=~w,,,,,,,,,._ _'''~'''_#M'''''",''''''''_.'''=h#''''''''M''"",,,,,m,=
__c"''''''#''#''''''''M==_'''',,,m#M,,,,w,,,,,,,,,,.,,''#M'''#MM''"'W"'''''''' ''#''''_'''''.'''''''''#'>=''''''''''''''''''>'>
Select [8] and set the

number of prints.
III
37

You can specify a portion of the image for printing.
Please set [Paper Settings] (p. 42) before setting the trimming
settings. If [Paper Settings] is changed after having made the
trimming settings, you must select the settings again .
.. Steps 2b and 3b
* Proceed to procedure 0 or depending

on the display scree~ which appears.
38

Trim the image.
the trimming frame.
as the image.
III
DISPLAY) button.
tii'e-SET'#~bifu'ttonMtok"cIose'#'ih'e"#'seiti'n'g-men'u''~'##'kW_'='"
ssing the MENU button cancels the settings.
39

Trim the image.
trimming frame.
as the image.
buttons.
to rotate it.
SET button.
40

• The paper size and page layout settings determine the shape of
the trimming frame.
II
41
Selecting the Paper Settings
Select [Paper Settings] and
The paper size setting screen
appears.
Select a paper size and press

the SET button.
The following paper sizes* are
available: 4" x 6", 5" x 7",
13 x 18 cm, 8.5" x 11", A4,
CreditCard, 8" x 10", A3, A3+/
13" x 19" and Default.
• Some sizes are not available
with certain cameras and
printer models.
The paper type setting screen
appears.
* Paper sizes vary according to region.
42
Select a paper type and
The following paper types can be
selected.
Photo Prints on Photo Paper
Plus Glossy paper*.
Fast Photo Prints on Photo Paper Pro
paper*.
Plain Prints on plain paper.
model.
* Canon brand paper
• Other kind of paper may be used.
For the usable paper, please also
refer to the printer user guide.
• The option you can select will
depend on the printer model and
paper size.
The Page Layout screen appears.
Select a layout.
The following layout can be
selected.
Borderless Prints right to the edges
of the paper.
N-Up*1 Prints 2,4,9 or 16
images on a single sheet
of paper (p. 44)
Bordered U Prints the shooting
information*2 onto a
blank sheet of paper
(size L or larger).
model.
*1Appears only when using the auto
sheet feeder and you select [4" x 6'1
in [Paper Size).
*2Prints the camera name, shooting
mode, shutter speed, aperture value,
exposure compensation, ISO speed,
etc., from the Exif information. 43

Printing Multiple Images on a Sheet of Paper
• Selecting [4" x 6"] in the paper size setting (p. 42) will allow
you to specify the following layout settings.
2 images (height 2 x width 1) of the same
2
dimensions are arranged on a single sheet of paper.
4
9
16
[Printing example 1] Printing 3 copies of image A in 2-up
Number of Image A:
0 0
copies (p. 37) [3] copies
Layout 2
.--------- ..
0
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1
1 ______ --_.1 1
DPOF print setting (p. 47) allows you to separately print different
images by specifying the number of frames to be printed per image.
[Printing example 2] Printing 3 copies of image A and 2 copies of
image B in 9-up
DPOF print Image A:
settings*
(p.47)
[3] copies
Image B: WWW
[]]wC~~~J
[2] copies
Layout 9
I
.._----.
~···_·--I ~
II II
~---"-·-I
I
I II II I
I. _____ -~I_______ I. ___ • __
~ ~
* Please refer to the Camera User Guide for instructions on DPOF print
setting method.
44
Select a layout and press=~ihe sEfHmbutton~'This~~'hWW=W'~=M'
ends the paper settings operations.
The display returns to the print order screen.
• Images will print with borders, even if [Borderless] was selected

with the camera in the following cases:
•When [Plain] is selected in the camera's [Paper Type] (cannot be
selected depending on the connected printer model)
•With printers equipped with an operation panel, when [Plain] is selected
with the printer and [Default] is selected in the camera's [Paper Type].
II
45

of paper.
movie you want to

button.
....;,::,;,:,:,::,:.y.,:,,:.:;:.,:""·x···.;·,·,;.,;.:'··,:·,,
'''':''''':~'''''.;.:,,:.: ,..·,·,··..,,·,;.:·y.·,;'.. ,:::·:·,::~/.·:·;:.;·:,;:.;.:·;.'.:·y.~,'l ":"":-:'::';':'.;:.;.:.:;)'.1;:.;.:<~:.:.%«.;,,,;,,::.;.;.;,:;: ~"I.-;.:.:;;:.;.:.

select II!I(Print), then press
the SET button.
Refer to Viewing Movies section of the
Camera User Guide on how to display
the movie frame you wish to print.
'Seie'ci'' II'' an'd"'set'' til'e' ' '

number of prints.
• If you press the rldJ,tV button instead of the SET button in Step 1,
movie print begins.
• Selecting [Paper Settings] and pressing the SET button in Step 3 will
allow [Paper Size], [Paper Type] and [Page Layout] to be selected.
46
48
Cancel Printing
the SET button. The printer will stop printing the current image
and eject the paper.
Restarting Printing
Printing Errors
• On printers equipped with an operation panel, an error number
or message displays on the panel. Please refer to the printer
user guide for the remedies corresponding to the error numbers
or messages.
49

List of Messages
The following messages may appear on the camera LCD monitor if
an error occurs during a camera and printer connection.
(Depending on the printer, some messages may not appear.)
• Please refer to the printer's user guide for the appropriate
remedies.
: Printing restarts if you select [Continue] and press the SET
button. For the remedies to other messages that might
appear, refer to your printer's user guide.
There is no paper set in the printer. If you are using
a printer equipped with a photo paper cassette,
No Paper
specify the paper feed location using the Paper
Feed switch.
The paper jammed during printing. Select [Stop] to
Paper Jam cancel printing. Remove the jammed paper, reset
some other paper in the printer, then print again.
Either the paper is not set correctly in the printer, or
Paper Error the size of the paper is wrong. Also open the paper
output tray if it is closed.
The ink tank has run out of ink or there is no ink
tank in the printer. The number of times that the
printer's error lamp blinks, and the error message
No Ink
displayed, will indicate the appropriate remedy for
the error. Please refer to the printer's user guide for
the remedy.
The ink tank needs to be replaced soon. Prepare a
new ink tank. If you select [Continue] in the error
screen, you can restart printing.
You can restart printing if you select [Continue] in
the error screen. Please request replacement of the
waste tank (waste ink absorber) from your nearest
Canon Customer Support center listed in the
Contact List provided with the printer or in the user
guide.
There is a problem with the ink. If the printer's error
lamp is blinking and an error .message is displayed,
Ink Error
please refer to the printer's user guide to ascertain
the problem and its remedy.
50
Disconnect the cable from the printer and turn off
the printer power. Then reconnect the cable and
turn on the printer. If the error persists, please
Printer error
request a repair from your nearest Canon Customer
Support Center (listed in the Contact List provided
with the printer).
The printer is in use now. The printer automatically
Printer in use starts printing the images from the camera after
completing the current printing.
Adjust the paper thickness lever to the proper
position.
Printer cover open Close the printer cover securely.
If the printer's error lamp is blinking and an error
No print head message is displayed, please refer to the printer's
user guide to ascertain the problem and its remedy.
If the printer's error lamp is blinking and an error
Hardware Error
- - - - - - -
message is displayed, please refer to the printer's
user guide to ascertain the problem and its remedy.
You tried to print an image that is not compatible
III
with PictBridge. Some images that have been
File Error
recorded with another camera or modified using a
computer cannot be printed.
Paper of a different size than the specified paper
size is set to the printer. Select [Continue] on the
Incompatible paper error screen to display the paper size setting
size screen. Correct the paper size using the screen
(only the selectable paper sizes appear on the
screen).
Check that the correct paper size is selected. If this
error message appears even when the correct
paper size is set, turn off the printer, then turn it on
Print error
again. If the error persists, please request a repair
from your nearest Canon Customer Support Center
(listed in the Contact List provided with the printer).
Unprintable settings are included. Select [Continue]
on the error screen to display the print order screen.
Check print
Check the print settings (only the printable settings
settings
appear on the screen), change the settings if
necessary, then print again.
51

Fa Printing with Non-Canon,
PictBridge Compliant Printers
Printing
'"»'M'aI(e"'s'u're"'i'h'aih"D'~'d"ispiays»''i''n'"
LCD monitor.
After this step, follow the procedures in the section D Printing with
Bubble Jet Printers (PIXMA series/ SELPHY OS series) using
PictBridge (p. 32) to print your images.
However, the following menu options cannot be set.

• Print Effect (p. 36): [Vivid], [NR], [Vivid+NR], [Face~]
• Paper Size (p. 42): [A3+/13" x 19"] and [5" x 7"/13 x 18cm]
Please also refer to the user guide that came with your printer.
52
[!J Printing with SELPHY
CP Series Printers using
Canon Direct Print
If you use Canon Compact Photo Printer

SELPHY CP71 O/CP51 0
When printing, on wide-size paper, an image that has been shot
using a Canon digital camera's 11 (wide) size, select D from
[Print Method] on the camera's (Set up) menu.
After this, see m
Printing with SELPHY CP Series Printers using
PictBridge (p. 10).
Printing
Easy Print
Make sure that ~ displays in

LCD monitor.
'W~,mM"W~"W~" " ' ' ",~,·",W_' ' 'w~,m, m',m.,#, ., , , , , , , ~,",W' ' ' '_' ' ~'" ' '"' ' 'M,' _' '·X·.' ' ',X' ' M,' ' ' ~' ;' ' '~' 'W',m.,x' ' '" '"" #,~,w"""""~'''",,M''M''''W,o_1I
~¢v button.
Changing the Print Settings below.
53

Make sure that ~ displays in

LCD monitor.
Ifm displays on the LCD monitor,
please refer to m Printing with
SELPHY CP Series Printers using
PictBridge (p. 10).

button.
Sets the Print Style (p. 55)
Sets the Printing Area (Trimming)

(p.57)
settings as required.

If you press the MENU button, the display will revert to the
standard playback mode and printing will not take place.
54
Cancel Printing
• You cannot stop printing when printing only one copy of an
image. If you are printing more than one copy or more than one
image, you can cancel the rest of the printing by pressing the
SET button. Once the current print is finished, a confirmation
dialog appears. Select [OK] and press the SET button.
Printing Errors
during the printing process. Select [Stop] or [Resume] and
press the SET button. See List of Messages (p. 70) for details.
The [Resume] option may not appear with some types of errors.
In that case, select [Stop].

Inthe~dWprintWo'rderm'scree'n':"s"eTe'cfIiI"·a'nd-s'etd«ihe"'~ddd'h'W'"
number of prints.
Setting the Print Style (Image, Borders and Date)

You can select from among the following print styles.
III
Standard Prints one image per page.
Prints eight copies of the same
Image Multiple*
image on one page.
10 Photo Prints a specified print size (p. 61).
Borderless Prints right to the edges of the paper.
Borders
On Adds the date to the print.
Date
Off Prints without the date.
* This option can only be selected when printing on credit card size paper.
55

Select [Image], [Borders], or
[Date].
b""""""x',=",=",",,,,,,",,n.,,,,,,,,,,_w,,,,",,,,,,,,,x·,x,',,.,,,,,w,,"',,",,,,,," """"','w•., x'w.,·,.<···~""·,,,,,·,',·,',.,w·,,'x,,··" , ,·,..,..,<;·.. ,'. ··,·,,"w·,·,·· ,··,··, ·"·"'·'·'·'."·"k'·",,,,,,·;c,.W·"·'·"'·""·'·'.,.,·, "·'·X·""·"'«;"'·'··"""""~'X·"'''·'''''''''·'··.,, " ".,
Select settings as needed.
Press the MENU button to

end the setting selection
process.
With borderless or multiple prints,
the top, bottom and sides of the
image may be cropped slightly. If
you have not specified a trimming
setting, a frame will appear around
the area of the image that will be
printed, allowing you to check the
portion that will be cropped.
56
• When printing multiple prints, the [Borders] and the [Date]
cannot be set. (Images are printed without any date or borders.)
• Practically all of the image area displayed on the LCD monitor is
printed on bordered prints.

You can specify which portion of an image gets printed.
Please set the Print Style (Image, Borders and Date) before setting
the trimming settings. If the print style is changed after having
made the trimming settings, you must select the settings again .
.. Steps 2b and 3b
* Proceed to procedure 0 or depending

on the display screen which appears.
57

Trim the image.
the trimming frame.
as the image.
grainier depending on the level of magnification. If this
happens, the trimming frame displays in red.
DISPLAY) button.
T button to close the setting menu.
Pressing the MENU button cancels the settings.
58
Trim the image.
trimming frame.
as the image.
grainier depending on the level of magnification. If this
happens, the trimming frame displays in red.
buttons.
to rotate it.
SET button.
59
• The selected image and border settings determine the shape of
the trimming frame.
60
Printing by Specifying the Print Size (10 Photo
Print)
You can specify the print size and print portion of an image or a
whole image as an ID photo*.
* Images printed with the 10 Photo Print function may not be allowed as a
formal certificate photo. Refer to the party (organization) or administration
requiring the photo.
In the print order screen,

select [Style] and press the
SET button.
Select [Image], then select

[10 Photo]. Specify the print
size by selecting the length
of the long side and the short
side, then press the SET
button.
Specify the size by selecting the
length of the long side first, then
II
the short side. See the next table
for selectable combinations of the
long side length and the short side
length.
61

• Selectable combination
. .: Available print size
Short Side
50mm
Trim the image to specify the

print area.
See Step 2 of Setting the Printing
Area (Trimming) (p. 58 and p. 59)
on how to trim the image.
The trimming setting screen differs

depending on the camera model.
Follow the steps according to the
screen that displays on your
camera.
s the SET button to close the setting menu.
62
• The shape of the trimming frame varies depending on the
specified print size.
• Use the LCD monitor to specify the print size settings. The
III
63
Select the movie you want to
button.
Single-frame
of paper.

select ft!I(Print), then 'press
the SET button.
Refer to Viewing Movies section of
the Camera User Guide on how to
display the movie frame you wish
to print.
Select ilw"'ancrwch'oo'se""'''"''''''~'''~W""''#'''M''
[Single].
Select II
and set the
number of prints.
64

[Print] and press the SET button.
Sequence-frame
You can print movie frames selected automatically at fairly regular
intervals on a sheet of paper.
=-"w'''='"~''''''"'''~"'""#''''''"'"'''"''';'s'eIe''ci'"'m''·('P';:'i'ni)'''an'(i''''pre'ss''''''''o
the SET button.
If necessary, select [On] or

[Off] in III
(Caption).
If you set a
(Caption) to [On], you •
can print the file number and the
elapsed time of the frame at the
same time.
65

• If you press the ~¢v button instead of the SET button in Step
1, movie print begins.
• The number of printed movie frames per sheet of paper with
[Sequence] is determined by the paper size shown as follows:
(Depending on the number of seconds in the movie, there are
cases when the number of frames indicated below will not be
printed.)
• Credit card size: 20 frames
• L size: 42 frames
• Postcard size: 63 frames
• Wide size: 63 frames
• Selecting [Style] and pressing the SET button in Step 4 will
allow [Image] (excluding [ID Photo]) and [Borders] to be
selected.
However, [Style] cannot be set (p. 65) when [Sequence] is
selected.
66
(Setting the DPOF Print Settings)
With the camera's II!II(Print) menu, you can specify and print
multiple images or all the images on a memory card. For
instructions on how to specify images, please refer to Setting the
DPOF Print Settings section of the Camera User Guide. In this
section, we will explain how to print images after specifying them.
In the II!ft (Print) menu, select

[Print] and press the SET
button.
• When an image or images have
been specified (see the Camera
User Guide), the ~¢v button will
light up blue. At this time, if you
press the ~¢v button, the
screen for Step 2 will be displayed.
_"'"""""","",.,,,,=,,~',w."ff./'''~_M'~'"''»,,"'M''·'''''"'''''<'''''"w.·,w.,,.''"~w."","·",.»~«w""·"»"."·,,,,.,.,,,.,,,,,,,,,",,.'''»''·'.".w.."""""""''''''''''"'''''''''''''''''''«'''''''''.'''''''''''''''''.,."'.'0""".""'..""""'"'''''''.''''.'''''0''''.'''.",..,."""",.,.
Set the print style settings as

required.
• See Setting the Print Style
(Image, Borders and Date)
(p.55).
• A print style cannot be set if [Print
Settings] on the screen in Step 1
is set to [Index].
"Wh~W'''Q'''""M''ff._'~_'''#.'''_~''.""""""",-",'''M''.·'.",,,,~,,,,,,.w.,,,.,,,,w·,·,·,.,,,,.·,,.·.,·,·,,,,,,.,,,,.~,,·,···,,.,,.,·,··.Q.",·. ·"·"'".''''·.'M.''''~.,,,·,,',,.,,',,·,'w.,,',.,',·,,· ".,."", .." .····w··.··"··""·",,,,·,.,.·,.,,,,·,,,·,,,·,.·,,'.,·•.·, '.·"·,···"·,·,,,.«w.,.,·,,,,··.•···...·.··,·,
Select [Print] and press the

SET button.
• The image will start to print and,
when it is completely finished, the
display will revert to the standard
playback mode.
• If the MENU button is pressed,
the display will revert to the
screen in Step 1 and printing will
not take place.
67

• The maximum number of images printed on one page in the
Index print type depends on the selected paper size.
• Credit card size: 20 images
• L size: 42 images
• Postcard size: 63 images
• Wide size: 63 images
Cancel Printing
button.
Once the current print is completed, a confirmation dialog
appears. Select [OK] and press the SET button.
Restarting Printing
68
Printing Errors
during the printing process. Select [Stop] or [Resume] and
* The [Resume] option may not appear with some types of
errors. In that case, select [Stop].
III
69
List of Messages
The following messages may appear on the camera's LCD monitor
when an error occurs during a camera and printer connection.
(Depending on the printer model, some messages may not
display.)
• Please refer to the printer's user guide for solutions.
Paper cassette is incorrectly inserted or out of
No Paper
paper. Or the paper feed is not operating correctly.
The ink cartridge has not been inserted or has run
No Ink
out of ink.
Incompatible paper Wrong paper size is loaded in the printer.
size
Incompatible ink Wrong ink cassette size is loaded in the printer.
size
Ink Cassette Error The ink cassette is experiencing a problem.
Paper and ink do not The paper and ink are from different sets.
match
Paper Jam The paper jammed during printing.
Paper has been Paper was changed after the print style was
changed displayed.
Recharge the printer The printer's battery pack is depleted.
battery
Communication The printer is experiencing a data transmission
Error error.
You attempted to print the image with a different
Readjust trimming style than the one used when the trimming settings
were set.
You attempted to print an image that was
photographed with another camera, one recorded
Cannot Print!
in a different data type, or one that has been edited
on a computer.
You attempted to use the DPOF print settings to
print xx images that were photographed with
Could not print xx
another camera, that have been recorded in a
images
different data type, or that have been edited on a
computer.
70
I:!j Printing with
Bubble
Jet Printers using Bubble
Jet Direct
Printing
"""","".- -----=-Niake sure-that L!i displays in
LCD monitor.
Ifm m
displays, refer to Printing
with Bubble Jet Printers (PIXMA
series/ SELPHY DS series) using
PictBridge (p. 32).
After this step, follow the procedures in the section ~ Printing with
SELPHY CP Series Printers using Canon Direct Print (p. 53) to
print your images.
However, please note that some menus and precautions
differ, as listed below.
See pages 54 and 68.
•
71
Cancel Printing
the SET button.
The printer will stop printing the current image and eject the
paper.
Printing Errors
print job.
• With printers equipped with an operation panel, the error
number displays on the panel. Please refer to the printer user
guide for the remedies corresponding to the error numbers.
See page 55.
Setting the Print Style

You can select from among the following print styles.
Select the paper size from the following:
[Card #1], [Card #2], [Card #3], [LTR] or [A4].
Paper
For usable paper types, please refer to the
printer user guide.
Borderless Prints right to the edges of the paper.
Borders
On Adds the date to the print.
Date
Off Prints without the date.
72

See page 68.
II
73
Settings that Can Be Set with the
Camera
Fa SELPHY CP Series Printers using
PictBridge
(When Fa appears on the camera's LCD monitor during a
connection)
Print Options Selectable with the Camera
Date
File No.
Date/File No, Both
Off
Default
Off
Print Effect On
Default
Number of Prints 1 to 99
Trimming
CreditCard
9 x 13 em
Paper Size 10 x 14.8 em
4" x 8" or 10 x 20 em
Default
Paper Settings Bordered
Borderless
N-up 1 2/4/(8")
Page Layout
10 Photo
Fixed Size
Default
Movies Single
(Movie Print) Sequence
74 "This option can only be selected when [CreditCard] size paper is set.

ra Bubble Jet Printers (PIXMA seriesl
SELPHY OS series) using PictBridge
(When D appears on the camera's LCD monitor during a
connection)
Some settings are not available with certain cameras and printers.
Print Options Selectable with the Camera
Date
Fite No.
Date Both
Off
Default
Off
On
Vivid
Print Effect NR
Vivid+NR
Face~
Default
Number of Prints 1 to 99
Trimming
Movies (Movie Print)
75

4" X 6"
13 x 18 em
5" x 7"
A4
8.5"x11"
Paper Size*1
CreditCard
8" x 10"
A3
A3+/13" x 19"
Default
Paper Settings
Photo
Fast Photo
Paper Type
Plain
Default
Bordered
Borderless
N-Up*2 12/4/9/16
Page Layout
Bordered! (print with the
shooting in ormation)
Default
*1 Paper sizes vat}' accordmg to regIon.
*2 This option can be specified by selecting [4" x 6'1 in [Paper Size].
76
~SELPHY CP Series Printers using Canon Direct Print
~ Bubble Jet Printers using Bubble Jet Direct
(When or m mappears on the camera's LCD monitor during a
connection)
SELPHY
Bubble Jet
CP series
Printers
Printers
Print Options Selectable with the Camera using
using
Bubble Jet
Canon
Direct
Direct Print
Number of Prints 1 to 99 0 0
1 image 0 -
Image Multiple 0*1 -
ID Photo 0 -
Card #1, Card #2,
Style Paper Card #3, Letter (LTR) _*2 0
orA4
Bordered 0 0
Borders
Borderless 0 0
Date 0 0
Trimming 0 0
Movies Single 0 -
(Movie Print) Sequence 0 -
*1 This option can only be selected when [CreditCard] size paper IS set.
*2 Paper size will be set automatically according to the paper cassette set to
the printer.
77

Canon
CDI-M241-01D 0406CH90 © 2006 CANON INC. PRINTED IN JAPAN

DPUG12

.. STOP! Be sure tc :nstalJ the driver software from the
enclosed CD-ROflJ1 before connecting the camera to
..
your computer with this cable.
STOP! Veillez a installer Ie pilote a partir du CD fourni

avant de brancher Ie cable de connexion de I'appareil
..
photo numerique a I'ordinateur.
iATENCION! AsegOrese de haber instalado el driver que
contiene al CD-ROM antes de conectar la camara at
ordanador con este cable.

('dnlnlll
, For Macintosh For Windows® i

--
~
'"
Canon Utilities:
ImageBrowser 5.6
Photo5titch 3.1
Canon Utilitie~:
ZoomBrowser EX 5.6
Photo5titch 3.1
J
~
-
~ E05 Utility 1.0 Camera TWAIN Driver 6.6 J
~ ArcSoft PhotoStudio 4.3 Camera WIA Driver 6.4 0
~
\ G
\. EOS Utility 1.0
~ t~
~
,I!
II
Arc50ft Photo5tudio 5.5
c Apple Q u i c k T i m e o
'0
\"1; QuickTime l f~
% /
~, #~
, ••~O' C84-1418 ,,~'
P
r~~ 0"'0(':
~~% ~~~#
d~~rks '6
1
~\O
Or tradernar. . hef c.olJ.{\'U
ks of Microsoft Corporation In ot'

Supplied with Camera
•
Neck Strap NS-DC4
PCMCIA Adapter USB Card

PowerShot S3 IS (PC Card Adapter) Reader
Lens Cap
Canon Digital
Camera Direct PrintCompa~ible
AAAlkaline Solution Disk Bubble JelPrinter
Batteries (x4) (PIXMAseries/
SELPHYDSseries)
Battery/Charger Kit
CBK4-300 (*4)
SD Memory Card
• SDC-128M *1 Also available for purchase separately.
High-Power Flash • SDC-512MSH *2 See the user guide supplied with the Bubble Jet
HF-DC1 printer for more information on the printer and
interface cables.
*3 This camera can also be connected to the Card
• Battery Charger CB-5AH/CB-5AHE
Photo· Printer CP-1 O/CP-1 OO/CP-200/CP-300.
• AA-size NiMH batteries *4 The Battery and Charger Kit CBK4-200 can also
NB-3AH (x4)
TVNideo be used.
* NiMH Battery NB4-300 (set of 4 AA-size)
also available separately
Audio In
CDI-E216-01 A 0406CH55 Terminal (RlL)
© 2006 CANON INC. PRINTED IN JAP~N

lionfirming the ~a(kage Contents C)ptional .ccessories Direct Print Compatible Printers
Your camera package includes all of the The following camera accessories are sold separately. Some accessories are not sold in some regions. Canon offers the following separately sold
following items. If any of these items are printers for use with the camera. You can
missing, please contact the dealer for produce photo quality prints quickly and
assista nce. easily by connecting them to the camera
• lens Adapter/lens Hood Set LAH-OC20 • SO Memory Card with a single cable and operating the
This conversion lens adapter and hood set SD Memory Cards are used to store images camera's controls.
• Digital Camera is required for mounting the wide recorded by the camera.
• Lens Cap converter and tele-converter to the Canon brand cards are available in 128 MB • Compact Photo Printers (SElPHY series)
• Neck Strap NS-DC4 camera. and 512 MB capacities.
• PIXMA series printers
• Wide Converter WC-OC58A • Interface Cable IFC-400PCU
• AA Alkaline Batteries (x4) Converts the focal length of the body lens Use this cable to connect the camera to a
For more information, visit your nearest
• Memory Card (16MB) by a factor of approximately 0.75 when computer, Compact Photo Printer (SELPHY
series), or to a Bubble Jet printer (refer to
Canon retailer.
attached.
• Interface Cable IFC-400PCU
• Tele-converter TC-OC58B your Bubble Jet printer user guide).
• StereoNideo Cable STV-250N Converts the focal length of the body lens • Stereo/Video Cable STV-250N
• Canon Digital Camera Solution Disk by a factor of approximately 1.5 when Use this cable to connect the camera to a
attached. TV set (sound can be played in stereo).
• Basic Camera User Guide • Close-up lens 5000 (58mm)
• Advanced Camera User Guide This lens can be used to take close-ups of
subjects that are 35 to 50 cm (at maximum
• Direct Print User Guide
telephoto) from the front of the lens.
• Software Starter Guide
• System Map (this sheet) Rlmltl .
• Warranty Card • High-Power Flash HF-OC1
• IIFor Windows® XP and Mac as x Users II This attachable supplementary flash can be
Leaflet used to capture photographic subjects that
are too distant for the built-in flash to
• "Canon Customer Support" Leaflet illuminate.
• Compact Power Adapter CA-PS700

This adapter lets you power the camera
from any standard household power
outlet. Recommended to power a camera
for an extended period of time or when
connecting to a computer.
• Battery/Charger Kit CBK4-300
This dedicated battery charger kit includes
both a charger unit and four rechargeable
AA-size NiMH (nickel metal hydride)
batteries. Convenient when taking or
playing back large numbers of images.
• NiMH Battery NB4-300
A set of four rechargeable AA-size NiMH
batteries.

Canon
{~J'tt-l::::\A C:*~~~~D /Canon Customer Support
~
~
• dS~~ ,*&1)~ ,tt:.te:~'tt:.imBa0)1*~iE±te~lct~ dS~7C0)1*~iE_It:~2~ • La garantia del producto 0 productos es valida solo
LJ tt:.±te~It:~N}E~1t~~ 'tt:.tc~ ,~~ '*90 en el pais que aparece escrito en su certificado de
• ~Balt:::>~ '~o)dSr~~ 'ab1t$l[;lct~~Ba/.lS:1*O)QXm~B~_cL:m garantia.
~i{<tc~~'o • Guarde este impreso en lugar segura ya que
contiene informacion importante.
• i~J'"tt-I::\AO)L:*~~lct~ ~~16~ L:m~i{0)3 x~ dS~~ '..tl:fO)
·PR~JiS*tt:.lct~ ~Uito) r"ttjf\-I'Jj\4' ~J 1t:~2~~n~~'Q~D
It: L:*~~< tc~~ '0 limB
• La garantie de ce ou ces produits n'est valide que
ImI!iI dans Ie pays indique sur votre certificat de garantie.

• Veuillez conserver cette feuille car elle contient
• The warranty of the product(s} is effective only in the d'importantes informations.
country written on your warranty certificate.
• Please safekeep this sheet as it contains important
information.
• La garanzia del prodotto (0 prodotti) e valida solo net
~ paese indicato sui vostro certificato di garanzia.
• Siete pregati di tenere questa foglio in un posta
• Die Gliltigkeit der Garantie des Producktes/der
sicuro perche contiene informazioni importanti.
Produkte beschrankt sich auf das angegebene Land
auf Ihrem Garantieschein.
• Bitte bewahren Sie diesen Zettel sicher auf, da IBm
wichtige Information enthalten sind. ·~F~~~~R~~~~~m~B~~*$fi~o
• lI:t~icBfim~fAJ~i~:?t~1*g 0

Canon Inc.
30-2 Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo
146-8501 , Japan
Canon U.S.A., Inc. Canon Canada Inc.

Canon Customer Care Center Phone (Canada): 1-800-0K-CANON (1-800-652-2666) (24 hours/day, 7 days/
Phone (US): 1-800-828-4040 (Available Mon. - Fri., 9 AM to 8 PM Eastern Time) week)
www.powershot.com Manuals available for download: http://www.canon.ca (Go to "Customer Support")
Manuals available for download: http://www.powershot.com/powershot2/
customer/manual. htmI
Europe, Africa & Middle East

Canon Europa N.V. Canon Luxembourg S.A.
PO Box 2262, 1180 EG Amstelveen, The Netherlands Tel.: (352) 48 47 961 Fax: (352) 48 47 96232
Canon (UK) Ltd. Canon Nederland N.V.
Helpdesk Helpdesk: 023 - 5 681 681
Tel.: 08705 143723 (Calls may be recorded.) Fax.: 08705 143340 Tel.: 023 - 5 670 123 Fax: 023 - 5 670 124
Canon Communication & Image France S.A. Canon Danmark A/S

Tel: 01.41.99.70.70 Fax: 01.41.99.79.50 Phone: +45 44882400 e-mail: helpdesk@canon.dk
Canon Deutschland GmbH Canon Espana S.A.

Customer Hotline: (02151) 349-555 Help Desk: 906 301 255
Fax: (91) 411 54 48 E-mail: helpdesk1 @btlink.net
Canon Italia S.p.A.
Pronto: Canon: 02 8249 2000 E-mail: supporto@canon.it
Canon Norge as
Tlf. 22629321
Canon Belgium N.V. / S.A. Faks: 22 62 06 15 E-mail: helpdesk@canon.no
Helpdesk: 0900-10627
Tel.: (02) 722.04.11 Fax: (02) 721.32.74

Finland Austria
Canon OY Canon GmbH
Puhelin: 010 54420 Fax: 010 5444571 Zetschegasse 11, A-1230 Wien Vienna
Help Desk: 0600 0 22606 (14,80 mklmin+pvm) Helpdesk Tel: 01 66 146 412 Fax: 01 66 146 308
Help Desk: 0600 0 22666 (enint. 40mklpuhelu+pvm)
Sahkoposti: helpdesk@canon.fi
Canon (Schweiz) AG
Tel. 01-835-6161 Fax: 01-835-6526 Hotline 0900 57 55 20
Canon Svenska AB
Helpdesk: 08-7448620
Canon Australia Pty. Ltd. Canon New Zealand Ltd.

Info-Line: 131383 Customer Care: (09) 489 0470
www.canon.com.au www.canon.co.nz
Canon Singapore Pte. Ltd. Canon Marketing (Thailand) Co., Ltd.

1 HarbourFront Avenue, #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632 10th Floor, Bangkok City Tower, 179/34-45 South Sathorn Road, Bangkok 10120,
Phone: (65) 6799 8888 Fax: (65) 6799 8882 Thailand
Canon Hongkong Co., Ltd. Phone: (662) 344 9999 Fax: (662) 344 9910
9/F, The Hong Kong Club BUilding, 3A Chater Road, Central, Hong Kong Canon Marketing (Hongkong) Co., Ltd.
Phone: 852-2739-0802 Fax: 852-2369-7701
10/F, Mirror Tower, 61 Mody Road, Tsimshatsui East, Kowloon HongKong
Canon Marketing Services Phone: 852-2170-2828 Fax: 852-2723-9684
NO.1 Jalan Kilang Timor, #09-00, Pacific Tech Centre, Singapore 159303
Phone: (65) 799 8888 Fax: (65) 273 3317
Canon Marketing (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.
Wisma General Lumber, Block 0, Peremba Square, Saujana Resort, Section U2,
40150, Shah Alam, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia
Phone: (60) 3 744 6000, (60) 3 745 0055 Fax: (60) 3 745 0505

CDI-M217-01A 0406CH60 © 2005 CANON INC. PRINTED IN JAPAN
CDI-M200-010 IMPRIME AU JAPON

Canon
Register your product online at
www.powershot.com/productregistration and...
{@
Receive firmware and software upgrades
Canon USA often updates the software and firmware for its digital photography products.
You will be among the first ones to receive the notifications.
Protect your product

We will keep the model number and date of purchase of your new Canon product on file to
help you refer to this information in the event of an insurance claim such as loss or theft.
Receive information on new products and promotions

Upon your request, we will send you information on Canon new products and promotions.
CDX-M003-01 A 0206CH150 © 2003 CANON INC. PRINTED IN JAPAN

IMPRIME AU JAPON

Paper Cassette
NB~CP2l
Battery Pack
iD Photos and Movie Print t

Easily print tD photos for a variety of applications
(up to 28 different sizes). Create frame··by-frame
index prints of your latest movie.
camera models.
CDX·E019 For more information, please visit: \!'fNw.usa.cam:m.com/consumer (U.S.A.) \I1!ww.canon.com.mx (Mexico) All images simulated. Subject to change without notice.

Ca.....o ~.. I..
lft CANON® PowerShot Digital Camera™ Limited Warranty-
For U.S.A. & Canada Only
The limited warranty set forth below is given by Canon U.S.A., Inc. (Canon U.S.A.) in the United States or Canon Canada Inc., (Canon Canada) in Canada with respect to the Canon-brand
PowerShot Digital Camera, and CompactFlash™ memory card, compact power adapter, AC cable, video cable, PC/Mac IF cables and DC coupler for the PowerShot Digital Camera
(collectively the "PowerShot Digital Camera"), packaged with this limited warranty, when purchased and used in the United States or Canada.
Your PowerShot Digital Camera, when delivered to you in new condition in its original container, is warranted against defects in materials or workmanship as follows: for a period of one (1)
year from the date of original purchase, defective parts or a defective PowerShot Digital Camera returned to Canon U.S.A. or Canon Canada, or their authorized PowerShot Digital Camera
~ervice providers, as applicable, and proven to be defective upon inspection, will be repaired with new or comparable rebuilt parts or exchanged for a refurbished PowerShot Digital
Camera, as determined by Canon U.S.A. or Canon Canada, or the authorized PowerShot Digital Camera service provider, in their sole discretion.
THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER ANY ACCESSORIES NOT MENTIONED IN THE FIRST PARAGRAPH ABOVE*. This limited warranty shall only apply if the PowerShot Digital
Camera is used in conjunction with compatible computer equipment and compatible software, as to which items Canon U.S.A. or Canon Canada shall have no responsibility.
Non-Canon brand equipment and software that may be distributed with the PowerShot Digital Camera are sold "as is" and without warranty of any kind by Canon U.S.A. or
Canon Canada, including any implied warranty regarding merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose, and all such warranties are disclaimed. The sale warranty, if any,
with the respect to such non-Canon brand items is given by the manufacturer or producer thereof.
This limited warranty covers all defects encountered in normal use of the PowerShot Digital Camera, and does not apply in the following cases:
(a) Loss of or damage to the PowerShot Digital Camera due to abuse, mishandling, improper packaging by you, alteration, accident, electrical current fluctuations, failure to follow
operating, maintenance or environmental instructions prescribed in Canon U.S.A.'s or Canon Canada's user's manual or services performed by someone other than Canon U.S.A. or
Canon Canada, or an authorized PowerShot Digital Camera service provider. Without limiting the foregoing, water damage, sand/corrosion damage, battery leakage, dropping the
PowerShot Digital Camera, scratches, abrasions or damage to the PowerShot Digital Camera body, lenses or LCD display, or damage to accessories mentioned in the first paragraph
above, will be presumed to have resulted from misuse, abuse or failure to operate the PowerShot Digital Camera as set forth in the operating instructions.
(b) Use of parts or supplies (other than those sold by Canon U.S.A. or Canon Canada) that cause damage to the PowerShot Digital Camera or cause abnormally frequent service calls or
service problems.
(c) If the PowerShot Digital Camera has had its serial number or dating altered or removed.
NO IMPLIED WARRANTY, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, APPLIES TO THE POWERSHOT DIGITAL
CAMERA AFTER THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF THE EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY STATED ABOVE, AND NO OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTY OR GUARANTY, EXCEPT AS
MENTIONED ABOVE, GIVEN BY ANY PERSON OR ENTITY WITH RESPECT TO THE POWERSHOT DIGITAL CAMERA SHALL BIND CANON U.S.A. OR CANON CANADA. (SOME
STATES AND PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.) CANON
U.S.A. OR CANON CANADA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF REVENUES OR PROFITS, INCONVENIENCE, EXPENSE FOR SUBSTITUTE EQUIPMENT OR SERVICE,
STORAGE CHARGES, LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA, OR ANY OTHER SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR MISUSE OF, OR
INABILITY TO USE, THE POWERSHOT DIGITAL CAMERA, REGARDLESS OF THE LEGAL THEORY ON WHICH THE CLAIM IS BASED, AND EVEN IF CANON U.S.A. OR CANON
CANADA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL RECOVERY OF ANY KIND AGAINST CANON U.S.A. OR CANON CANADA BE
GREATER IN AMOUNT THAN THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE POWERSHOT DIGITAL CAMERA SOLD BY CANON U.S.A. OR CANON CANADA AND CAUSING THE ALLEGED
DAMAGE. WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YOU ASSUME ALL RISK AND LIABILITY FOR LOSS, DAMAGE OR INJURY TO YOU AND YOUR PROPERTY AND TO OTHERS
AND THEIR PROPERTY ARISING OUT OF USE OR MISUSE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE, THE POWERSHOT DIGITAL CAMERA NOT CAUSED DIRECTLY BY THE NEGLIGENCE OF
CANON U.S.A. OR. CANON CANADA. (SOME STATES AND PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.) THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO ANYONE OTHER THAN THE ORIGINAL
PURCHASER OF THE POWERSHOT DIGITAL CAMERA, OR THE PERSON FOR WHOM IT WAS PURCHASED AS A GIFT, AND STATES YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY.
Canon U.S.A.
You may obtain technical support for your Powershot Digital Camera as follows:
• E-mail support via Canon U.S.A.'s Web site at www.usa.canon.com I
• Telephone assistance from a Canon U.S.A. Customer Care representative free of charge during regular business hours (currently Monday-Friday 9:00 a.m.-8:00 p.n;. EST, excluding
holidays) at 1-800-828-4040 or 1-800-0K-CANON (1-800-652-2666). .
Canon Canada
You may obtain technical support for your PowerShot Digital Camera as follows:
• Telephone assistance from a Canon Canada Customer Care representative free of charge during regular business hours (currently Monday-Friday 9:00 a.m.-8:00 p m. EST,
excluding holidays) at 1-800-0K-CANON (1-800-652-2666).
Have your PowerShot Digital Camera serial number and your date of purchase available when you make the call to expedite service. A Canon U.S.A. or Canon CanarJa Customer Care
representative (as applicable) will attempt to diagnose the nature of the problem and correct it over the telephone. If the problem cannot be corrected over the telephone. you will be asked
to follow the applicable procedures for MAIL-IN SERVICE.
Technical support program subject to change without notice.
MAIL-IN SERVICE
MAIL-IN SERVICE is a program under which your PowerShot Digital Camera is repaired by a Canon U.S.A. or a Canon Canada authorized PowerShot Digital Camera service provider.
You will be given the name, address and phone number of an authorized PowerShot Digital Camera service provider, by contacting the Canon U.S.A., Customer Care Center at 1-800-828-
4040 or Canon Canada Customer Information Centre at 1-800-0K-CANON (1-800-652-2666). It is your responsibility to properly package and send the defective PowerS hot Digital
Camera, together with a copy of your dated proof of purchase (a dated bill of sale is sufficient), a complete explanation of the problem and a return address to the authorized PowerShot
Digital Camera service proVider at your expense. Do not include any other items with the defective PowerShot Digital Camera. The defective PowerShot Digital Camera covered by this
limited warranty will be repaired and returned to you without charge by the authorized PowerShot Digital Camera service provider. Any PowerShot Digital Camera received by the
authorized PowerShot Digital Camera service provider that is not covered by the limited warranty will be returned unrepaired, or at the discretion of the authorized PowerShot Digital
Camera service provider, you may receive a written estimate of repair at such cost as the service provider may establish from time to time.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights, which vary from state to state (or province to province in Canada).
*The battery pack carries a separate ninety (90) day limited warranty.
Canon U.S.A., Inc. Canon Canada, Inc.

One Canon Plaza 6390 Dixie Road
Lake Success, NY 11042 Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7
USA Canada
(The above address is not to be used for the MAIL-IN SERVICE program) (The above address is not to be used for the MAIL-IN SERVICE program)
© 2000 Canon U.S.A., Inc. Canon is a registered trademark and PowerShot is a trademark of Canon Inc.
All brand or product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective owners.
NAME
NOM
ADDRESS
ADRESSE
CITY POSTAL CODE
VILLE PROVINCE CODE POSTAL
THIS WARRANTY CARD AND YOUR BILL OF SALE MUST BE
PRESENTED FOR WARRANTY SERVICE. MODEL
CETTE CARTE DE GARANTIE ET VOTRE PREUVE D'ACHAT
MODELE PowerShot S3 IS
DOIVENT ETRE PRESENTES POUR RECEVOIR LE SERVICE
SOUS GARANTIE. BODY NO. ,<we
BOITIER NO
DEALER'S NAME & ADDRESS WiflJllillfllllilfllfrJ",,'"
MARCHAND NOM & ADRESSE
l
!
PURCHASE DATE
DATE D'ACHAT
/ /
CDW-M002-02A 0206CH250 PRINTED IN JAi-'AN

IMPRIME AU JAPON
PRESENT OWNERSHIP AND PRODUCTS INTERESTED IN

OWNS INTERESTED IN
Articles deja en possession ou juges dignes d'interet
En possession Interesse par
CAMERAS
APPAREILS (Camera) (Lens)
-PHOTO (Appareil) (Objectif)
(Camera) (Lens)
(Appareil) (Objectif)
INTERCHANGEABLE LENS OWNS INTERESTED IN OWNS INTERESTED IN
Objectif interchangeable En possession Interesse par En possession Interesse par
NAME ADDRESS
Nom ......"--.:....--------------- Adresse
CITY/STATE ZIP PHONE

Ville/Province Code postal --------Telephone - - - - - - - -

Manual s3 Is

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Manual s3 Is

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

1111111111111111111111111111111111

Camera User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

• PDF manuals available on the Canon website.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1 Insert the batteries.

~ See the Advanced Guide: Handling the MemoryCard(p. 133)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

~ First Time Settings

til IOpening the LCD Monitor

2. LCD monitor is opened to the left 180

* The Reverse Display function can be set

1 Turn the mode lever to Q

The power/mode indicator lights orange or

• When switching between shooting and

2 Press the OFF button to turn the

I Setting the Date/Time

I 1 Turn the camera on (p. 3).

2 Select the item you wish to set

3 Confirm that the correct time

::- Whe~ou tG~~-~th~~;me7athe fi~~Ttime:an-d;he~n th~ith~~ dateT-'!

1 Turn the mode lever to [E]

2 Hold down the SET button

2 Set the mode dial to fD).

The shutter sound will play, and the image

~See Basic Shooting Functions(p. 8)

Press the shutter button halfway again to stop displaying it.

I[l] :O~::~~;~;::~~d:~~~:::::::::~:::: :u:~:I:~: ):not available I pi!

~SeetheAdvancedGuide: Shooting aMovie (p.46)

Image Composition Shooting - - - - -

Some settings can be changed in each shooting mode (Advanced

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

I Creative Zone Items

1 Raise the flash manually, and shoot.

The flash fires with every shot.

The flash will fire automatically.

When the red-eye reduction When the red-eye

rs¥l • ranges are em m

Shooting Close-Ups (Macro/Super Macro)

To cancel the macro mode: press the ,~ button to remove ~~ or ~

* Images will be shot in

ISuper Macro Mode

2 Use the'" or ~ button to select the image.

Ii.lllli.,g , "",,', , ' ':

~ 2 Use the'" or ~ button to select

1.1i¥I P~otec!ed ima.ges cannot be erased

~See the Advanced Guide: Erasing Allimages(p. 110)

To select an item (@)

~ Seethe Advanced Guide: FUNC.Menu, Menulist(p.28)

From shooting mode

To switch between menu~ (CD)

To select an item (@)

To change the setting (@)

When you finish making settings

Press the MENU button.

~ See the Advanced Guide: Menus and Settings (p. 26)

1 Connect the camera to a Canon Direct Print compatible

SELPHY CP Series Compact

PIXMA Series/SELPHY OS Series

2 Turn on the camera in Playback mode. Confirm that ~, rn or

3 Select an image to print with the ~ or ~ button (@) and press

I Camera to Computer Connection

I Using a Memory Card Reader

::- Whe~ou tG~~-~th;me7athe fiTtime:an-d;he~n th~ith~~ dateT-'!

I[l] :O~::~~;~;::d:~:::::::::~:::: :u:~:I:~: ):not available I pi!